Section 1 PDF
Section 1 PDF
Section 1 PDF
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 1
1.
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................... 2
1.1
GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.2
COMPLIANCE ............................................................................................... 2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.3
STANDARDS ................................................................................................. 3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
References to Standards
Government Published Specifications, Regulations, Notices and Circulars
Survey Marks
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.4.10
1.4.11
1.4.12
1.4.13
1.4.14
1.4.15
1.4.16
1.4.17
1.4.18
1.4.19
General
The Contract
The Government
The Contractor
The Engineer
The Engineers Representative
The Owner
The Site
The Works
The Drawings
The Construction Plant
The Temporary Works
The Specifications
Specified
Approved
Project Documentation
Guarantee
Government Departments and Utility Services
Singular and Plural
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
General
Site Conditions
1.6
LANGUAGE ................................................................................................... 8
1.6.1
Contract Language
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
7
8
QCS 2010
2
2
2
2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 2
INTRODUCTION
1.1
GENERAL
1.1.1
This Section specifies the general clauses applicable to Works being carried out in
accordance with this Specification.
1.1.2
The clauses in this Specification are applicable in varying degrees to each and every part of
the Works. Their function is to bring together all those statements which are normally
common to most types of work.
The Qatar Construction Specification applies to the entire Works, whether on the Site or in
yards, workshops and factories employed elsewhere in connection with the Works.
1.1.3
References
1.1.4
1.2
COMPLIANCE
1.2.1
Unless otherwise stated in the Project Documentation, the Contractor shall comply with
every requirement of the Qatar Construction Specification that is relevant to the type of work
forming any part of the Contract and shall adopt whichever permissible option or alternative
that is best suited to the needs of the construction work being undertaken.
Any information in the Contract documents as to the whereabouts of existing services and
mains is approximate and for the guidance of the Contractor who shall not be relieved of his
obligations under Clause 11 of the General Conditions of Contract or Part 19 of Section 1 of
this Specification.
1.2.2
The Qatar Construction Specification is intended for use with the General Conditions of
Contract.
The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract in the
course of construction of the Works.
QCS 2010
1.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 3
STANDARDS
1.3.1
References to Standards
Any standard referred to in this Specification shall be deemed to be the version and/or
standard(s) which supersedes, that was current forty-two days prior to the date of return of
Tenders.
The Contractor shall provide copies of all referenced standards applicable to the work being
undertaken. Translations of standards not written in English shall be provided where
necessary.
1.3.2
The works shall be executed in accordance with the following Government specifications,
regulations, notices and circulars:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
The General Conditions of Contract prepared by the former Ministry of Public Works.
The Qatar Construction Specification (QCS) issued by the Qatar Standards,
Laboratories and Standardisation Affairs, Ministry of Environment, 2010 and all
revisions and addenda issued by the same ministry prior to the date of the
announcement inviting tenderer.
The Code of Practice and Specification for Road Openings in the Highway prepared
by the Ministry of Industry & Public Works, January 1992.
The Guide for Civil Users of Explosives in Qatar prepared by the former Ministry of
Public Works.
The Qatar Survey Manual prepared by the Survey Section of the former Ministry of
Industry & Public Works.
The Qatar Traffic Manual prepared by the former Ministry of Public Works and the
Qatar Highway Design Manual prepared by MMAA, 1997.
The Traffic Control at Road Works Manual issued by the former Ministry of Industry &
Public Works.
Rules, Regulations and Code of Practice for Design and Installation of Air
Conditioning, Heating, Ventilation & Refrigeration (ACHVR) Systems for Government
Buildings, 2nd Edition, 1989, prepared by Qatar General Electricity and Water
Corporation (QGEWC).
Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring by the former Qatar National
Telephone Services.
The Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical Equipment and Air
Conditioning Equipment, Feb 2006 Edition prepared by the Qatar General Electricity
and Water Corporation (QGEWC).
Rules and Regulations for Plumbing Works prepared by the Qatar General Electricity
and Water Corporation (QGEWC).
Any current and relevant regulations, notices or circulars issued by the Public Works
Authority, Ministry of Municipal Affairs & Agriculture (including the previous Ministry of
Public Works and the previous Ministry of Industry and Public Works), Qatar General
Electricity and Water Corporation (QGEWC) (including the previous Ministry of
Electricity and Water), Qatar Telecom (Q-TEL), the Qatar Standards, the Supreme
Council for the Environment and Natural Reserves or the appropriate local
Municipality prior to the date of the announcement inviting tenderer.
State of Qatar Law No. 30 of 2002 and all subsequent amendments concerning The
Environment and Natural Resources Protection Articles 6, 17, 19 & 35.
State of Qatar Law No. (6) of 1987 and all subsequent amendments concerning
Materials and Equipment from Qatar or other CCASG countries.
The Method of Measurement for Road and Bridgeworks published by the Ministry of
Industry and Public Works, Civil Engineering Department , 1987.
QCS 2010
1.3
QCS 2010
(p)
(q)
(r)
(s)
(t)
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 4
The Contractor shall be deemed to have his own copy of the Government specifications,
regulations, notices and circulars given at (a) to (t) above.
Where any standard publication, specification, regulation, notice, etc or any correspondence
refers to a Government Ministry, department, division, section, etc it will be deemed to be the
same as any successor Ministry, department, division, section, etc which has or may
subsequently be officially promulgated by the Government of the State of Qatar.
1.3.3
Survey Marks
The Contractor shall consult the Engineer prior to any earth or other works to determine if
the work is likely to disturb survey marks. If the Engineer requires a survey mark to be
moved the Contractor will be responsible for recreating the survey mark to an approved
design and specification, and for resurveying the point using survey companies approved by
the Engineer authority.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the survey marks within the
boundaries of the site for the duration of the contract period, and shall be liable for all costs
of any remedial work required by the Engineer.
On the practical completion of the Works the Engineer will issue a certificate stating that all
survey marks, whether disturbed or otherwise by the Contractor, have been reinstated or
protected to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
In the event of failure to comply with the requirements of this Clause the Engineer, without
prejudice to any other method of recovery, may deduct the costs of any remedial work after
the practical completion date carried out by the Engineer, from any monies in its hands or
which may become due to the Contractor.
1.4
1.4.1
General
Terms and definitions shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 6100.
The following terms and conditions shall apply when used within, or in association with, the
Qatar Construction Specification. Terms, which are restricted in their application to certain
types of material or workmanship, are dealt with in the appropriate Section.
The definitions given in the General Conditions of Contract shall apply to this specification.
1.4.2
The Contract
The binding agreement between the Government and the Contractor for the construction of
the Works.
1.4.3
The Government
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 5
The Contractor
The company or organisation responsible for the construction of the Works, and who have
entered into a contract with the Government.
1.4.5
The Engineer
The person, firm or corporation appointed as such by the Owner for the purposes of the
Contract unless specified otherwise in the Project Documentation.
1.4.6
The resident engineer or resident architect or assistant of the Engineer or any Clerk of
Works appointed from time to time by the Engineer to perform the duties set forth in Clause
2 of General Conditions of Contract whose authority shall be notified in writing to the
Contractor by the Engineer.
1.4.7
The Owner
The Ministry, Municipality, Department, Affairs, Agency, Authority, or individual for whom the
Project is being undertaken and to whom the handover of the final product will be made.
1.4.8
The Site
1.4.9
The Works
1.4.10
The Drawings
1.4.11
All appliances or things of whatsoever nature required in or about the execution, completion
or maintenance of the Works or Temporary Works but does not include materials or other
things intended to form or forming part of the permanent work.
1.4.12
All temporary works of every kind required in or about the execution, completion or
maintenance of the Works.
1.4.13
The Specifications
All specifications contained in the Contract including any modifications or additions thereto
as may from time to time be issued or approved in writing by the Engineer.
1.4.14
Specified
1.4.15
Approved
Terms such as approved, approved by, to the approval, as directed and the like refer
always to approval or directions given by the Engineer in writing.
QCS 2010
1.4.4
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 6
Project Documentation
1.4.17
Guarantee
1.4.18
Any reference in the Specification to historic names of Government departments and utility
owners shall be read as the successors name.
TPA (Third Party Inspection Agency) - where stated in the documents is the approved
authority who is responsible on behalf of the Engineer for inspection/service/release.
1.4.19
Words importing the singular only also include the plural vice versa where the context
requires.
1.5
1.5.1
General
Units shall generally be in accordance with the Systm International dUnits and the
relevant provisions of BS ISO 80000
A
C
c
d
dia
g
h
ha
J
k
l
M
m
m
N
No.
nr
Pa
r
sec
t
V
W
QCS 2010
microns
ampere
Celsius
centi
day
diameter
gram (me)
hour
hectare
joule
kilo
litre
mega
metre
milli
Newton
number
number
Pascal
radius
second
tonne
volt
Watt
1.4.16
QCS 2010
3
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 7
Q-TEL
SIS
UK DOT
UPDA
VDE
1.5.2
Site Conditions
QCS 2010
AASHTO
ACI
ANSI
ASME
ASTM
AWS
AWWA
BS
BSI
C & CA
CEE
CIBSE
CIRIA
CRSI
CS
DIN
EIA
EN
FHWA
FM
GS
ICE
IEC
IEE
IEEE
ISO
LPC
LPCB
MMAA
NEMA
NFPA
PCI
PWA
QCS
QGEWC
QS
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 1
Introduction
Page 8
Mean hourly wind speed of not less than .........30 m/s (as per BS EN 1991-1-4)
Yearly rainfall.......................................................80 - 150 mm
The wind is very directional and that the W-NNW sector predominates for velocities greater
than 8m/s (30km/h). However, the wind in coastal areas tends to exhibit a diurnal pattern,
with onshore winds during daylight hours changing to offshore at night.
The temperature is relatively mild from October to May and hot from June to September.
The relative ambient humidity is generally low from October to May and generally high from
June to September.
A considerable amount of salt is contained in the atmosphere which together with the
relatively high ambient humidity, can produce sever corrosion problems.
Distribution and occurrence of rainfall events are very erratic. Rainfall events are generally of
a high intensity with a short duration and usually occur between December and March.
The prevailing wind directions are from the north and west.
1.6
LANGUAGE
1.6.1
Contract Language
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 2
Page 1
2.
2.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
2.1.1
Scope
2.2
2.2.1
General
2.3
2.3.1
General
2
2
2
Qatar Project Management
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 2
2.
2.1
GENERAL
2.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the uses and maintenance requirements of the Site.
2.2
2.2.1
General
The Site shall not be used for any purpose other than that of carrying out the Works.
Temporary camps, housing and cooking facilities shall not be permitted on the Site unless
otherwise stated in the Project Documentation. When temporary camps, housing and
cooking facilities are permitted they shall comply with Clause 10.7.3
2.3
2.3.1
General
In accordance with Clause 33 of the Conditions of Contract the Site, the equipment used
upon it and the Works shall be kept clean at all times.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
Part 10
Part 11
Part 12
Page 2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 3
Page 1
3.
3.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
3.1.1
Scope
3.2
ACCESS ROADS........................................................................................... 2
3.2.1
3.3
SITE ENTRY.................................................................................................. 2
3.3.1
2
2
2
Qatar Project Management
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 3
Page 2
3.
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for access to the Site including temporary access roads,
and the Contractors entry onto the Site.
Part 16
Traffic Diversions
ACCESS ROADS
3.2.1
The Contractor shall arrange for, construct, maintain and afterwards remove and reinstate
any access required for and in connection with the execution of the Works.
Reinstatement shall include restoring the area of any access route to at least the degree of
safety, stability and drainage that existed before the Contractor entered the Site.
The Contractor is required to maintain and provide satisfactory temporary access and traffic
flow to, from and within the areas of the works. Temporary traffic signs and lighting for
temporary roads and diversions are to be in strict accordance with the requirements of the
Qatar Traffic Manual and any additional requirements instructed by the Traffic Police or the
Engineer. Details of proposals for any such measures are to be submitted by the Contractor
for approval to the Traffic Police and the Engineer prior to the implementation of the
diversions or temporary roads unless otherwise instructed. Such approval shall not relieve
the Contractor of any of his duties or responsibilities under the Contract.
The Contractor shall maintain at all times pedestrian access to all properties fronting the
roads affected by the works.
The Contractor shall at all times during the Contract maintain safe and proper access to and
from adjacent buildings and properties.
The Contractor shall maintain at all times all the traffic signs, lighting, barriers, cones and
whatever additionally required to keep the diversions, temporary roads and pedestrian
access in a very good condition and best workable status.
3.3
SITE ENTRY
3.3.1
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing 14 days in advance of his intentions to
start work. If construction of the Works includes operations in two or more areas, such
notifications shall apply to each area.
Working areas for which access is subject to time constraints shall be as detailed in the
Project Documentation.
Any known hazards in the working areas shall be detailed in the Project Documentation.
The Contractor shall keep records of the dates of his entry onto and departure from all areas
included in the Works, together with the dates of the erection and removal of temporary
hoarding, and shall furnish copies of these records when required by the Engineer.
QCS 2010
3.2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 3
Page 3
The Contractor shall make a record to be agreed with the Engineer on the condition of the
Site immediately before entering for the purpose of constructing the Works.
Prior to commencing Work in roads the Contractor shall complete, and submit to the
Engineer, the necessary inventory forms (Road Safety Division Site Inventory form, the
Street Name Inventory etc). The Contractor shall be responsible for rectifying any damage
to the above signs in the absence of an approved inventory prior to construction.
Where work is required on the Owners plant the Contractor shall comply with the Owners
permit procedure prior to commencement of work.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 4
Protection
Page 1
4.
PROTECTION ............................................................................................... 2
4.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
4.1.1
Scope
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
General Protection
Protection of Finishes, Equipment and Surfaces
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.5
HOARDING.................................................................................................... 3
4.5.1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 4
Protection
Page 2
PROTECTION
4.1
GENERAL
4.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements associated with the protection of the Works and other
works, watching and lighting and for Site hoarding.
4.2
4.2.1
General Protection
The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the care and protection of the Works and
Temporary Works against damage of any kind for the duration of the Contract.
In the event of any damage to the Works or Temporary Works, the Contractor shall
undertake all necessary repairs at his own cost.
4.2.2
The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the protection of finishes, equipment and
surfaces that form part of the Works. Protective coatings and wrappings shall be left on
items for as long as possible and practicable.
In the event of any damage to finishes, equipment or surfaces, the Contractor shall all
necessary undertake repairs at his own cost.
4.3
4.3.1
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to avoid causing any unwarranted
damage to roads, land, properties, trees and other features and, during the currency of the
Contract shall deal promptly with any complaints by owners or occupiers.
Where any portion of the Works is close to, across, or under any existing apparatus, the
Contractor shall temporarily support and work round, under or adjacent to the apparatus in a
manner designed to avoid damage, leakage or danger, and to ensure uninterrupted
operation of the apparatus.
Should any leakages or damage be discovered, the Contractor shall at once notify the
Engineer and the owner concerned, as appropriate and the Contractor shall afford every
facility for the repair or replacement of the apparatus affected.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage caused by him, his work people,
sub-contractors or suppliers to public or private roads, paved areas, paths, verges, trees,
shrubs, fences, boundary walls, gates, signs, drains, ducts and services during the execution
of the Contract and shall bear the cost of making good any damage to the entire satisfaction
of the local and other authorities and owners. The Contractor shall keep all private roads
and paths clean and free from dirt and debris and any obstruction associated with the works,
which would prejudice the safe and unimpeded normal use of the said roads and paths.
4.3.2
Details of all claims or warnings of intended claims which the Contractor may receive, shall
be brought to the attention of the Engineer without delay. Likewise, any such claims or
QCS 2010
4.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 4
Protection
Page 3
warnings, which may be submitted directly to the Engineer shall be passed to the Contractor
without delay.
A similar exchange of information shall also be made in relation to all complaints which may
be received.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing immediately following any damage or
injury resulting from the execution of the Works.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the repair of other works
due to damage caused by the Contractor.
4.3.3
The Contractor shall protect all Government survey control points within the limits of the site
from any damage whatsoever, during the construction of the Works.
All control points shall be clearly marked on Site by the Contractor and any necessary
temporary protection works shall be installed as directed by the Engineer.
Should any control point be damaged during the course of the works, its replacement and
any other costs incurred (such as resurveying) shall be borne by the Contractor.
4.4
4.4.1
Further to Clause 19 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall provide all
watching and lighting and everything else necessary by day and night for the protection of
the public.
4.4.2
Further to Clause 19 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall provide all
watching and lighting and everything else necessary by day and night for the protection
against theft of goods, materials, plant, etc., from the Site to whomsoever belonging.
4.4.3
Further to Clause 19 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall provide all
watching and lighting and everything else necessary by day and night for the protection
against damage of the Works.
4.4.4
The Contractor shall take all necessary and practicable precautions to prevent trespass onto
the Site whether it is intentional or unintentional.
4.4.5
Watchmen
The Contractor shall provide watchmen at the Site at all times outside of normal working
hours.
4.5
HOARDING
4.5.1
The Contractor shall only provide the temporary site hoarding described in this Clause where
it is stated as a requirement in the Project Documentation.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 4
Protection
Page 4
The site hoarding shall be painted corrugated galvanised sheet or similar, not less than 2
metres high and neat and uniform in appearance. The colour and any logos on the hoarding
shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The hoarding shall be a sufficient obstacle to
prevent the access of unauthorised persons or children and shall be complete with all
necessary entrance gates, fans, screens, guard rails and gantries as may be required to
ensure the safety of the public, occupiers of adjacent lands and of the Works.
The Contractor shall maintain, move and adapt the hoarding as and when required during
the progress of the Works and shall dismantle and remove upon completion of the Works.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 5
Interference
Page 1
5.
INTERFERENCE ........................................................................................... 2
5.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
5.1.1
Scope
5.2
INTERFERENCE ........................................................................................... 2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
Land Interests
Existing Properties
Existing Roads
Apparatus
2
2
2
2
2
Qatar Project Management
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 5
Interference
Page 2
5.
INTERFERENCE
5.1
GENERAL
5.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements associated with interference with land interests, existing
properties, existing roads and apparatus.
Part 15
Temporary Controls
INTERFERENCE
5.2.1
Land Interests
The Contractor shall confine his construction operations within the Site, or such other area of
land as may be negotiated, and shall instruct his employees not to trespass.
Subject to any unavoidable disturbance which may be necessitated by the execution of the
Works, the Contractor shall not interfere with land use which may be enjoyed on or near the
Site.
Before exercising any right negotiated by him in connection with using areas of land outside
the Site, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of such arrangements.
5.2.2
Existing Properties
Before interfering with access to any property, the Contractor shall provide alternative
arrangements. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the relevant occupiers in writing
fourteen (14) days in advance of any such interference and shall confirm to the Engineer that
alternative arrangements have been agreed.
5.2.3
Existing Roads
The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to prevent vehicles entering and leaving the
Site depositing mud or other debris on the surface of adjacent roads or footways, and shall
remove any materials so deposited.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to public or private roads or streets
arising out of or by reason of the execution of the Works.
The Contractor shall not permit tracked vehicles to travel along permanent or temporary
roads without the use of timber mats or other approved precautions to prevent damage.
5.2.4
Apparatus
The Contractor shall not obstruct access to any manhole or other surface access cover.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
5.2
Part 6
Project Meetings
Page 1
6.
PROJECT MEETINGS................................................................................... 2
6.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
6.1.1
Scope
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
General
Topics for Discussion
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
General
Topics for Discussion
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
General
Topics for Discussion
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
General
Topics for Discussion
6.6
RECORD OF MEETINGS.............................................................................. 5
6.6.1
Minutes of Meeting
2
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
QCS 2010
Part 6
Project Meetings
Page 2
PROJECT MEETINGS
6.1
GENERAL
6.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the meetings that will take place before, during and after the construction
of the Works.
6.2
PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
6.2.1
General
A pre-construction meeting shall be held at the Site. The Engineer shall set the date and
time of the meeting and shall notify the Contractor accordingly.
The Owner, the Engineer and the Contractor and their respective representatives shall
attend this meeting.
The Engineer shall provide the agenda a minimum of three (3) working days prior to the
meeting.
6.2.2
Contractual topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Contractors Obligation topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited to,
the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
Performance Bond.
Programme of Works.
Insurance.
Site related topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
QCS 2010
6.
Project Meetings
Page 3
Drawing and communication topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited
to, the following:
Project correspondence.
Project Documentation.
Daily reports.
Weekly reports.
Monthly reports.
Method statements.
Progress meetings.
Material approvals.
Submittals.
Miscellaneous topics of discussion will include, but not necessarily be limited to, the
following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
6.3
PROGRESS MEETINGS
6.3.1
General
Progress meetings shall be held once a month. Where possible and practicable, progress
meetings shall be held at the same time, day of the month and location.
The Engineer shall prepare the agenda and submit it to the Contractor a minimum of three
(3) working days prior to the meeting.
Progress Meetings shall be attended by the Engineer and his representatives and the
Contractor and his representatives. Sub-contractors may attend when involved in the
matters to be discussed or resolved but only when requested by the Engineer. In addition to
the attendees named herewith, the meeting shall be attended by representatives of utility
owners, Government departments and authorities and any other regulatory agencies having
jurisdiction over the Project, if required, and such other persons the Engineer may
designate.
The time and location of the progress meetings shall be as directed by the Engineer. The
Engineer shall chair the meetings.
The Contractor shall submit the information itemised below to the Engineer at least three (3)
working days prior to each progress meeting:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
If the Contractor requires additional Progress Meetings he shall submit his request in writing
to the Engineer. For any such additional meeting:
(a)
(b)
(c)
QCS 2010
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
5
Part 6
Part 6
Project Meetings
6.3.2
Topics of discussion will include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Page 4
Actual start and finish dates for activities completed during the update period.
Remaining durations and percentage completion for all activities not completed.
Logic, activity duration and cost data for Variation Order work that will be
incorporated into the construction schedule.
Contractors proposed measures to recover lost time and place the Project back on
schedule by increasing manpower, materials and equipment resources and working
extended hours, additional shifts, etc.
PRE-START UP MEETING
6.4.1
General
A pre-start up meeting is required prior to starting up any major plant component, subsystem or system.
Pre-start up meetings shall be attended by the Engineer and his representatives and the
Contractor and his representatives. If necessary, equipment manufacturers and/or suppliers
shall also attend.
The agenda for the meeting shall be provided by the Engineer a minimum of three (3)
working days prior to the meeting.
6.4.2
Topics for discussion will include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
6.5
POST-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
6.5.1
General
A post construction meeting shall be held prior to final inspection of the Work.
Post-construction meetings shall be attended by the Engineer, the Contractor and their
respective representatives.
The Agenda for the meeting shall be provided by the Engineer a minimum of three (3)
working days prior to the meeting.
6.5.2
Topics for discussion will include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
QCS 2010
6.4
Part 6
Project Meetings
Page 5
6.6
RECORD OF MEETINGS
6.6.1
Minutes of Meeting
A copy of the minutes shall be furnished to the Contractor within four (4) working days.
If the Contractor has any objections to the minutes he shall submit them in writing to the
Engineer not more than two (2) days after they are presented to him. In the absence of any
objection, it shall be understood and agreed that the Contractor accepts the minutes as true
and complete record of the meeting.
QCS 2010
END OF PART
Part 7
Submittals
Page 1
7.
SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................ 3
7.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 3
7.1.1
7.1.2
Scope
Mistakes in Information
7.2
DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................ 3
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
7.2.6
7.2.7
7.3
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES......................................................................... 4
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.3.7
7.3.8
7.3.9
7.3.10
General
Schedule of Submittals
Method of Submittal
Contractor's Review and Approval
Corrections and Re-submission
Check of Returned Submittals
Review and Approval
Incomplete Submittals
Conformance
Interrelated Submittals
7.4
PROGRAMME ............................................................................................... 6
7.4.1
Programme of Works
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.6
PLANS ........................................................................................................... 8
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.7
7.7.1
General
7.8
REPORTS...................................................................................................... 9
7.8.1
7.8.2
7.8.3
General
Procurement Status Reports
Progress Report
7.9
PHOTOGRAPHS ........................................................................................... 9
7.9.1
General
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
QCS 2010
3
3
Part 7
Submittals
Page 2
7.9.2
7.9.3
Pre-Construction Photographs
Monthly Photographs
7.10
DRAWINGS ................................................................................................. 10
10
10
10
10
11
7.11.1
7.11.2
7.11.3
7.11.4
7.11.5
General
List of Materials
Samples
Certificates
Manufacturers Guarantees and Warranties
7.12
16
7.14.1 General
7.15
14
15
13
13
13
14
14
16
7.15.1 General
7.15.2 Measurement of Quantities
QCS 2010
17
17
7.11
Part 7
Submittals
7.
SUBMITTALS
7.1
GENERAL
7.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the general procedures and requirements for submittals.
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Part 9
Materials
Part 10
Health and Safety
Part 13
Setting-out of the Works
Health and Safety
7.1.2
Mistakes in Information
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay the extra cost, if any, occasioned by
any discrepancies, errors, or omissions in submittals supplied by him, whether they have
been approved by the Engineer or not.
7.2
DEFINITIONS
7.2.1
Product Data and Shop Drawings include drawings, diagrams, illustrations, brochures,
schedules, bills of materials and other data prepared specifically for the Works.
The information must illustrate or describe the manufacture, fabrication, construction and
installation of the Works or a portion thereof.
7.2.2
As-Built Surveys are topographical surveys that show changes to topography as a result of
the construction of the Works. Changes to topography include the construction of new
structures and roads, demolition of existing structures and roads and the like. The As-Built
Survey Drawings shall form a comprehensive record of the topographical changes resulting
from the construction of the Works in all respects.
As-Built Surveys shall also show all sub-surface elements of the Works. Sub-surface
elements include pipelines, ducts, cables, chambers, manholes and the like. The As-Built
Survey Drawings shall form a comprehensive record of the sub-surface elements of the
Works as constructed in all respects.
7.2.3
As-Built Record Drawings are drawings that show the Works as constructed in all respects.
They are in addition to the elements of the Works shown on the As-Built Survey Drawings.
In addition to the above, the As-Built record drawings shall include all finished horizontal and
vertical alignments, chainages, setting out, levels, and details. It shall also include all
underground services, utilities, surface features, and any additional information deemed
necessary to comprehensively represent the works.
QCS 2010
Section 11
Page 3
Part 7
Submittals
Page 4
Manufacturers Representative
7.2.5
Temporary Works Drawings are plans for temporary structures and facilities prepared by the
Contractor specifically for the Works.
Elements of work that may affect the safety of persons or property shall be checked and
certified by an approved safety inspector.
7.2.6
Samples
Samples are physical examples illustrating materials, equipment, or workmanship and shall
be used to establish standards by which the work will be judged.
7.2.7
Manuals
Manuals are manufacturers written installation, start-up, operating, maintenance and repair
instructions. They shall include parts lists, pictures, sketches and diagrams specific to the
equipment supplied.
7.3
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
7.3.1
General
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his review and approval all drawings and
data as called for in the Project Documentation, this part or subsequently covered by
variations.
Submittals and their contents shall be properly prepared, identified, and transmitted in
accordance with the Project Documentation or as the Engineer may otherwise direct. Where
possible and practicable, the Contractor shall present submittals on A4 size paper.
All submittals shall be in triplicate and electronic format unless otherwise specified in the
Project Documentation.
7.3.2
Schedule of Submittals
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of all submittals, required by the Contract or
otherwise, showing the forecast date for submission of each item within thirty (30) days of
the start of the Contract.
Drawings and data shall be submitted to meet the time schedules stipulated in the Project
Documentation and where such time schedules are not specified, to meet the requirements
of the approved programme. Unless specified otherwise, the Contractor shall allow not less
than thirty (30) days for the review of submittals by the Engineer (excluding the time
necessary for delivery or postage) and shall cause no delay in the work or the work of any
other Contractor.
QCS 2010
7.2.4
Part 7
Submittals
Page 5
Extension of time will not be granted because of the Contractor's failure to make timely and
correctly prepared and presented submittals with allowance for the checking and review
periods.
7.3.3
Method of Submittal
The Contractor shall deliver submittals by means of dated, signed, and sequence numbered
transmittals. The transmittal shall be on the Contractor's letterhead and shall fully describe
the submittal contents. Submittals are not acceptable directly from sub-contractors,
suppliers, or manufacturers.
In each transmittal the Contractor shall state the Drawing numbers and Specification
Sections, Parts, and Paragraphs to which the submittal pertains. Accompanying data sheets,
catalogues and brochures shall be identified in the same manner. Where several types or
models are included in a single data sheet, catalogue or brochure, the Contractor shall
delete non-applicable portions or specifically indicate which portions are intended and
applicable.
7.3.4
Every submittal shall bear the Contractor's review and approval stamp certifying that the
Contractor has:
(a)
(b)
(c)
7.3.5
The Contractor shall make all required corrections and shall resubmit corrected submittals
until approved.
The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections
called for on previous submittals.
The Contractor shall identify each re-submission with the sequential number of the original
submittal followed by consecutive letters starting with "A" for first re-submission "B" for
second re-submission etc.
7.3.6
The Contractor shall check submittals returned to him for correction and ascertain if the
corrections result in extra cost to him above that included and allowed for under the Project
Documentation and the Contract. The Contractor shall give written notice to the Engineer
within five (5) days if, in his opinion, such extra cost results from corrections.
By failing to so notify the Engineer or by starting any Work covered by a submittal, the
Contractor waives all claims for extra costs resulting from required corrections.
7.3.7
Submittals will be reviewed only for conformance with the design concept of the Project and
with information given in the Project Documentation. The approval of a separate item as
such shall not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.
The approval of submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation
from the requirements of the Project Documentation unless otherwise agreed with, and
confirmed in writing by, the Engineer.
QCS 2010
Part 7
Submittals
Page 6
Any approval from the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or
omissions in the submittals.
7.3.8
Incomplete Submittals
Submittals which are incomplete, including those not correctly transmitted, not correctly titled
and identified, or not bearing the Contractor's review and approval stamp, may be returned
to the Contractor without review.
7.3.9
Conformance
Work shall conform to the approved submittals and all other requirements of the Project
Documentation and the Contract unless subsequently revised by an appropriate variation
order, in which case the Contractor shall prepare and submit revised submittals as may be
required.
7.3.10
Interrelated Submittals
Except where the preparation of a submittal is dependent upon the approval of a prior
submittal, all submittals pertaining to the same portion of the Works shall be submitted
simultaneously.
The Contractor shall not proceed with any related work which may be affected by the work
covered under submittals until the applicable submittals have been approved.
7.4
PROGRAMME
7.4.1
Programme of Works
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a Programme of Works in
accordance with Clause 14 of the General Conditions of Contract.
The Contractor shall update the Programme of Works as required during the construction of
the Works.
When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a detailed
programme for a particular section of the Works. The detailed programme shall be an
elaboration of the overall programme and shall be in an appropriate form.
The Contractor shall incorporate the times of occupation of all sub-contractors in the
programme and shall make provisions for the access of other contractors as required by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit a Programme of Works that shall include, but not be limited to
the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
QCS 2010
Part 7
Submittals
Page 7
The Programme shall be a linked and resourced Gantt chart produced on approved project
programming software and shall show the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
The Contractor shall programme his work in accordance with the Contract and in such a way
that he shall not impede any other Contractor working on or adjacent to the Site.
For sewerage works, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
programme his works such that he commences at the downstream manholes and continues
upstream in a logical sequence.
The Programme of Work shall identify when access to areas of live plant are required and
when shutdowns are required.
10
Any Programme of Work submitted with the tender documents shall be fully updated before
the start of the Works.
11
The Engineer shall give his comments on the programme within 7 days of its submission.
The Contractor shall not commence the permanent works until the Engineer has approved
his Programme of Work.
12
The approval by the Engineer of the Programme of Work shall not relieve the Contractor of
any of his duties or responsibilities under the Contract.
13
The programme shall be submitted in electronic format and as a paper print. The paper print
may hide (roll up) activities for individual tasks in order to reduce the size and number of
prints required. The electronic version shall be fully detailed.
7.5
ORGANIZATION CHARTS
7.5.1
The Contractor shall submit a Staff Organisation Chart for the Engineers approval within ten
(10) days of the start of the Contract.
The chart shall show the organisation of executive, administrative and supervisory personnel
associated with the Project and indicate the relationship between them where appropriate. It
shall include all personnel from Project Manager down to foreman level and give a full
description of their duties. The qualifications and experience of all personnel shown on the
chart shall be provided.
The Engineer may interview any of the personnel proposed by the Contractor prior to
approval.
The Contractor shall update the chart whenever key personnel are reassigned.
7.5.2
The Contractor shall submit a Health and Safety Organisation Plan for Engineers approval
within Thirty (30) days of the start of the Contract.
QCS 2010
Part 7
Submittals
Page 8
The plan shall be as detailed in Part 10 Occupational Health and Safety, of this section.
7.5.3
The Contractor shall submit a Quality Organisation Plan to the Engineer for approval no
later than 30 days from the start of the contract.
7.6
PLANS
7.6.1
The Contractor shall submit his Health and Safety Plan to the Engineer for approval no later
than thirty (30) days of the start of the Contract.
The plan shall be as detailed in Part 10 Health and Safety, of this Section.
7.6.2
The Contractor shall submit his Quality Assurance Plan to the Engineer for approval no later
than thirty (30) days of the start of the Contract.
7.6.3
The Contractor shall submit his ITP Schedule to the Engineer for approval no later 30 days
from the start of the contract.
7.7
SITE DIARY
7.7.1
General
A Site Diary shall be kept on site by the Contractor and entered daily for the duration of the
Contract. The diary must be entered neatly and legibly in English and should indicate all
visitors to the Site and the reason for the visit. The diary shall also record the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
The Contractor shall also supply to the Engineer, weekly returns as to the number of men
and Construction Plant employed and the nature of the Works on which they were employed.
The diary shall become the property of the Engineer on completion of the Works
QCS 2010
Part 7
Submittals
Page 9
7.8
REPORTS
7.8.1
General
The Contractor shall submit three copies of each report unless otherwise specified.
7.8.2
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Procurement Status Report on a weekly basis for
the duration of the Contract. The report shall include the following:
A list of materials and items procured.
A list of items delivered to the site.
References to all correspondence and transmittals between the Contractor and the
Engineer regarding approval of such materials and items.
7.8.3
Progress Report
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Progress Report on a monthly basis for the
duration of the Contract. The report shall be submitted to the Engineer before the seventh
day of each month. The report shall include the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
Labour employed on the Site divided into supervisory staff, tradesmen and others
giving daily totals.
Labour employed on the Site by sub-contractors divided into supervisory staff,
tradesmen and others giving daily totals.
Plant, tools and equipment in working order on the Site on each day.
Accidents to anyone working on the Site which required medical attention.
Details of monthly progress and status of the Works in general terms.
The date of commencement and completion of all critical activities.
Details of problem areas.
Details of current or anticipated causes of delay along with their estimated impact on
progress and the corrective measures taken or proposed.
Progress photographs.
7.9
PHOTOGRAPHS
7.9.1
General
The Contractor shall obtain a photographic record of the execution of the Works by taking
photographs from various points as the Engineer shall specify from time to time. Any
photograph which is not clear and distinct, double exposed, over exposed, etc. shall be
retaken until approved by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
Photographs taken in connection with the Project shall not be utilised by the Contractor for
commercial advertisement either of his organisation or of any materials or equipment used
on the Works, without the written approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer, two number photographic albums suitable for
mounting all site and progress photographs.
All photographic records shall consist of the required number of colour prints on
photographic paper and a digital copy
QCS 2010
(a)
(b)
(c)
Part 7
Submittals
Page 10
Pre-Construction Photographs
The Contractor shall arrange to obtain a photographic record of the Site before the start of
the works by taking photographs from positions agreed with the Engineer. Photographs and
a digital copy shall be handed to the Engineer within 7 days of the photographs being taken.
The number of photographs taken shall be sufficient to clearly indicate the condition of
existing conditions.
After approval, the Contractor shall supply two (2) prints, which shall be mounted and
labelled by the Contractor, and these shall then be signed and dated by the Contractor and
the Engineer. One set of prints shall be returned to the Contractor.
7.9.3
Monthly Photographs
The Contractor shall take photographs during the course of the Works in order to provide a
visual record of the Works and their construction. For progress photographs, the Contractor
shall take a minimum of 10 number colour photographs every month from positions agreed
with the Engineer. Photographs and a digital copy shall be handed to the Engineer within 7
days of the photographs being taken.
These photographs shall be included in the Progress Report, as described in Clause 7.8.3 of
this Part complete with labels and any pertinent supporting text.
7.10
DRAWINGS
7.10.1
Each submitted drawing shall be complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria,
materials, connections, bases, foundations, anchors, and the like, and shall be accompanied
by technical and performance data and by calculations as necessary to support the
information shown on the drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, each submittal shall include six (6) sets of copies and shall be
submitted at least thirty (30) days prior to beginning the work to which the drawings are
related. Three sets of copies will be returned to the Contractor marked to show the required
corrections or approval.
7.10.2
The Contractor shall prepare As-Built Record Drawings and submit them to the Engineer for
approval. Upon approval, the Contractor shall submit a further four (4) copies of each AsBuilt Record Drawing to the Engineer. All As-Built Record Drawings shall be prepared on
clear white polyester film or other durable and easily reproducible medium approved by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall also submit two digital copies of As-Built Record Drawings. The As-Built
Record Drawings shall be accompanied by operation and maintenance manuals, service
literature and list of spare parts where applicable.
The Contractor must prepare the As-Built drawings according to the latest specifications and
requirements of utility departments, including production and data delivery.
The Contractor may be required to obtain approvals from utility departments on the As-Built
drawings as a pre-requisite for the Engineers final approval.
As-Built Record Drawings and other documents shall be submitted before the expiry of the
period of maintenance named in the Contract. The final completion certificate will not be
issued, and therefore the final payment will not be released before the submission by the
QCS 2010
7.9.2
Part 7
Submittals
Page 11
Contractor, and approval by the Engineer of all drawings, documents, and records of the
project. One copy of each drawing and document shall be marked for archival storage.
No final payment shall be made until the As-Built Record Drawings are complete in all
respects and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra
payment or extension of time for the preparation of the As-Built Record Drawings.
7.10.3
The Contractor shall arrange for As-Built Survey Drawings to be prepared. The survey shall
be to the specification of the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Agriculture and shall be
undertaken by a survey company on the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Agricultures list of
approved survey companies.
Where a permanent feature has been added, changed or removed the Contractor shall
conduct a topographical survey engaging an approved survey company as described in item
1 of this Clause.
The Contractor shall submit one (1) set of As-Built survey Drawings to the Engineer for
approval. Upon approval, the Contractor shall submit a further four (4) sets to the Engineer.
All As-Built Survey Drawings shall be prepared on clear white polyester film or other durable
and easily reproducible medium approved by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documentation, the Contractor shall arrange for the
As-Built Survey Drawings to be prepared in digital (electronic) format. The digital format
shall be in accordance with requirements of the Centre for Geographic Information Systems
(CGIS). The Contractor shall also submit two digital copies of As-Built Survey Drawings. It is
the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the digital data compiled by the approved
survey company is comprehensive and complete. The Contractor shall at all times during
construction, maintain a comprehensive record of all setting-out details and data for
chainage, offsets, levels and all sub-surface elements, including pipe works, ducts, cables
and any other installation required under the Contract. These records shall be verified by the
Engineer. The records shall be incorporated into the As-Built survey undertaken by the
approved survey company to form a comprehensive and complete record of the works.
No final payment shall be made until the As-built Survey Drawings are complete in all
respects. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra payment or extension of time for
the preparation of the As-built Survey Drawings. As-Built Survey Drawings and other
documents shall be submitted before the expiry of the period of maintenance named in the
Contract. The final completion certificate will not be issued, and therefore the final payment
will not be released before the submission by the Contractor, and approval by the Engineer
of all drawings, documents, and records of the project. One copy of each drawing and
document shall be marked for archival storage.
7.10.4
Data Delivery
The mapping co-ordinate system for Public Works Authority projects (horizontal and vertical
control) is based on Qatar National Grid 1995. The following parameters shall be applied for
the digital data submittal.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
QCS 2010
Part 7
Submittals
e2
Page 12
0.006 722 670
(b)
(c)
DXF files for use in AutoCAD shall be ASCII text files or otherwise agreed with
Engineer. File names should have a maximum of eight characters plus the threecharacter extension (DXF).
DWG files for use in AutoCAD should have a maximum of eight characters plus the
three-character extension (DWG).
A digital terrain model, including break lines and contours shall also be supplied in a
recognised format: ASCII data files, SDR MAP File, MX GENIO file or as otherwise
agreed with the Engineer.
In addition to the following and other pertinent requirements, the Contractor shall obtain the
RD_CGIS LAYERING *.dxf convention files from the relevant department, and arrange it as
per item 8 hereunder or otherwise agreed with Engineer.
Each layer shall contain only one feature type. If necessary, text may be added to a separate
layer to explain the feature type. Colours and line type of features shall be specified by and
not individual entities or blocks. Features shall not be duplicated across layers. The
Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer the most current specification detailing colour and
line type conventions.
Features should not be represented with user defined symbols. The following representation
shall be applied.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Layer names should be general descriptions of features (eg. Road centreline, kerb, walls,
bollards). A list of all layers and associated descriptions shall be provided in the submittal
and the list shall be stored in an ASCII text file called: layers.txt. Layer name should have
up to 16 characters only and shall be restricted to letters and digits with the first character of
the name being a letter. Names shall not contain special characters such as: $, -. #. The
Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer the current specification detailing naming
conventions.
10
When the surface and other features are substantially in place, the contractor shall submit
the required *.dxf As-Built drawing files (for CGIS to execute the survey verification and
immediate update of CGIS Vector Database).
11
QCS 2010
Part 7
Submittals
Page 13
MATERIALS APPROVALS
7.11.1
General
Submittals shall be approved before the materials or equipment covered by the submittals
are shipped out in the case of foreign supplies and delivered to the Site in the case of local
supplies.
7.11.2
List of Materials
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of the materials to be used in the Construction
of the Works within thirty (30) days of the start of the Contract. The materials list shall be
neatly bound and shall have an index listing the contents.
The data for each item listed shall be explicit with regard to details of the actual items being
furnished and shall include sufficient information for the Engineer to determine that the
products submitted conform to the requirements of the Project Documentation. Such
information shall include but not be limited to:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
Unless otherwise specified, five (5) bound copies of the materials list shall be submitted, two
(2) of which will be returned to the Contractor marked to show the required corrections or
approval.
7.11.3
Samples
Unless otherwise specified, each submittal shall include two sets of samples. One set of
approved samples and all disapproved samples will be returned to the Contractor.
Samples shall be taken in accordance with the provisions of relevant standards where
appropriate.
Unless otherwise specified, samples shall be labelled and properly identified with the
following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Date.
Part of the Works for which offered.
Specification Section, Part and applicable Paragraph numbers.
Supplier/manufacturer.
Product identification (trade name).
Approved samples returned to the Contractor may only be incorporated into the Works upon
written approval of the Engineer.
QCS 2010
7.11
Part 7
Submittals
Page 14
Certificates
When stated in the Project Documentation or requested by the Engineer in writing, the
Contractor shall submit manufacturers certificates indicating that test results, component
manufacture or installation complies with the requirements of the Project Documentation.
A statement from the Contractor, sub-contractor, equipment supplier, or agent indicating the
product installation complies with the requirements of the Project Documentation shall not be
considered as a certificate.
7.11.5
Manufacturers Guarantees and Warrantees shall be submitted prior to handover and final
acceptance.
7.12
INSTRUCTION MANUALS
7.12.1
Final Dossier
The contractor shall submit final dossiers covering all civil, mechanical, electrical activities
and machinery installed in the work.
Contractor shall submit index of final dossiers to engineer for approval. This index shall be
included with the below points but not limited to:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
QCS 2010
7.11.4
Part 7
Submittals
Page 15
Photographs
7.12.2
This specification defines the production of installation, operation and maintenance manuals
and similar documents so that they provide information about plant and processes in a
consistent and informative way that shall make the documents easy to use. Manuals shall be
presented electronically and on paper. Documents from an electronic source shall, when
printed, conform to the requirements for documents presented on paper.
General Requirements:
(a)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(b)
All operations instructions shall use plain English language to reduce reader
difficulties. Statements shall be simple and short for easy comprehension; equipment
locations shall be clearly stated.
It may be valuable to begin the instructions with:
(i)
A condition:
If the pressure drops more than 5 bars, raise the
(ii)
A time phrase/clause:
When the meter displays Y, close the
(iii)
A location phrase/clause:
In the control room, turn
(iv)
A specification of tool or piece of equipment:
Using a screwdriver, remove
(v)
A sitting phrase/clause:
At instruments a, switch
QCS 2010
(b)
The plant operating manuals shall contain information relevant to the operation of the
plant installed. This information shall include descriptions of the plant together with
operating instructions and maintenance requirements.
The content shall be suitable for plant operators who are experienced in the operation
of similar equipment and have a basic technical knowledge. The descriptions shall be
clear and concise. Illustrations and schematics shall be used where necessary
Manuals shall be produced using word processor for text and CAD for drawings.
Text produced by the contractor/consultant describing the specific operation and/or
maintenance of an asset, which is contained within an operations manual, shall be
generated via a word processor and supplied to the Owner in Adobe Acrobat format or
otherwise agreed with Engineer.
Technical manuals when provided on paper shall be contained in A4 size, 4-ring, and
durable, hard-backed, white standard PVC covered binders, strong enough to last the
expected life duration of the plant.
The manual shall be provided in several volumes as appropriate to the size and
complexity of the plant. Each of the volumes shall not be greater than 38mm thick
when printed.
The covers shall have a clear PVC pocket on the front and on the spine for top entry
insertion of a white title card on which shall be printed the following information:
(i)
Owner.
(ii)
Name of location.
(iii)
Title of manual (name of the plant).
(iv)
Description of manual.
(v)
Volume of manual in the series.
(vi)
Reference/sequence number of the manual.
(vii)
Content of the volume.
(viii)
Contract reference number.
(ix)
Full name, address, telephone number and fax numbers of the supplier.
(x)
Name of author or editor of the manual.
Part 7
Submittals
Page 16
Text sheets shall be A4 size (portrait) having 4 No. punched holes and A3 size
drawings (landscape), folded twice with title in bottom right hand corner.
Full size drawings in plastic wallet placed at rear.
The bottom of each page shall define the manual reference number, issue number
with date (month/year) and page number.
The issue number commences at 1' on initial printing and shall be raised each time
the page is altered in any way.
Each page within a volume shall be numbered in sequence, including illustrations
pages, starting at the first page of the contents list.
7.13.1
Submittals associated with setting-out of the Works shall comply with the relevant provisions
of Part 13 of this Section, Setting out of the Works.
7.14
METHOD STATEMENTS
7.14.1
General
The Contractor shall prepare and submit method statements for all work activities including
major temporary works. He shall also prepare and submit method statements for any work
activities if it is a requirement of the Project Documentation or if instructed to do so by the
Engineer.
The method statements shall incorporate any supporting calculations, drawings and
manufacturers guidelines.
The method statements shall be submitted to the Engineer in ample time before the
operation described is started and no work is to be done without written approval from the
Engineer. The acceptance by the Engineer of a method statement shall not relieve the
Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract.
Method Statements shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements defined in Part 8,
Quality Assurance and Part 10, Occupational Health and Safety of this Section and Section
11 Health and Safety.
The Contractor shall submit a Method Statement Schedule to the Engineer for approval no
later 30 days from the start of the contract. The schedule shall be as defined in Part 8 Quality
Assurance of this section.
QCS 2010
7.13
Part 7
Submittals
Page 17
7.15.1
General
Applications and invoices for completed Works shall be submitted in accordance with the
Conditions of Contract.
7.15.2
Measurement of Quantities
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with all assistance, as and when required for the
measurement of all quantities. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation and
duplication of all calculations, cross-sections and other drawings related to quantities in
interim payments. These shall be submitted in draft to the Engineer in sufficient time to
enable him to check and agree them before submission for payments.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
7.15
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 1
8.
8.1
GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 3
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
Scope
References
Definitions
Contractors Responsibility
System Description
Failure to Perform
8.2
SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................ 5
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8.3.7
8.3.8
General
Quality Assurance Manager
Quality Control Manager
Quality Engineer
Quality Inspector
Personnel Qualifications
Quality Staff Requirement
Quality Training for Contractors Employees and Labour
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
General
Document and Data Approval and Issue
Document and Data Changes
8.5
8.5.1
General
8.6
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.7
8.7.1
8.7.2
8.7.3
8.7.4
8.7.5
8.7.6
8.7.7
General
Inspections and Tests
Inspection and Test Status
Inspections by the Engineer during construction
Inspections by the Engineer during Defects Liability Period
Workmanship
Measuring and Test Equipment
8.8
MATERIALS ................................................................................................. 14
8.8.1
5
6
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
QCS 2010
3
3
3
3
4
5
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 2
8.8.2
8.8.3
8.9
8.9.1
8.9.2
8.9.3
8.9.4
8.9.5
8.9.6
General
Review and Disposition of Nonconforming Items
Corrective and Preventive Action
Identification of Nonconforming Items
Acceptance and Approval of Nonconforming items
Nonconformance Records
8.10
LABORATORIES ......................................................................................... 17
8.11
17
18
8.12.1 General
8.12.2 Penalty for Poor Quality Works
8.13
17
17
17
15
15
15
16
16
16
18
18
19
8.14
8.15
8.16
8.17
QCS 2010
14
15
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 3
8.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
8.1
GENERAL
8.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the Quality Assurance activities to be performed by the Contractor during
all phases of the Contract.
8.1.2
References
8.1.3
Definitions
1.
Defect or Nonconformance : any part of the Works not executed, provided or completed in
accordance with the Contract. For the avoidance of doubt and without limiting the generality
of the expression the term shall be taken to include any item of Plant, material, goods or
work incorporated or used in the Works which does not or may not conform to the relevant
quality standards or pass the tests prescribed in or to be inferred from the Contract.
2.
3.
QA & QC : Quality Assurance & Quality Control and this may be written as QA/QC.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.1.4
Contractors Responsibility
Contractor shall, throughout the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying
defects therein have full regard for the Quality Assurance. Contractor shall note that the
Contract Price includes the Execution Programme for provision and implementation of a
Quality Management System to ensure that the appropriate standards are enforced
throughout construction, pre-commissioning and commissioning stages of the Works.
QCS 2010
Section 11
Part 7 Submittals
Part 10 Occupational Health and Safety
Occupational Health and Safety
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 4
The Contractor shall be responsible for all Quality Assurance and Quality Control matters
during the execution of the Work up to and including the Completion Date.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the development, implementation and maintenance
of a Quality Assurance Programme consistent with the requirements of this Part that assures
workmanship, equipment and material conformance to the applicable requirements of every
Section of the Specification.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the Contractor shall comply with every requirement
of the Qatar National Construction Specification (QCS) that is relevant to the type of work
forming any part of the Contract.
The Contractor shall obtain the necessary approvals from the relevant authorities for all his
Works (including Temporary Works and the use of Contractors Equipment).
The Contractors Representative shall observe and inspect the Works for all concerned
project Quality compliance during the performance of the Work up to and including the
Completion Date.
The Contractor shall ensure acceptable QA/QC performance and compliance of all Subcontractors, vendors and other parties who may enter or perform works at the Worksite.
The Contractor is required to copy to the Engineer any formal quality related communication
between the Contractor and enforcing authorities or government organisations.
8.1.5
System Description
The Quality Programme shall assure the quality throughout all applicable areas of Contract
performance, such as the design of temporary works and structures, inspections, testing,
handling, packaging, shipping, storage and construction activities.
The Quality Programme shall provide a mode of operation that emphasises the identification,
correction, and prevention of deficiencies and discrepancies.
Non-conforming work and materials, whether in place or not, will be rejected by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall be notified in writing to correct defective work or remove the
defective material from the Works. If the Contractor fails to respond, the Engineer may order
correction, removal, and/or replacement of defective materials by others. The Contractor
shall bear all costs for such work.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 5
The Contractor shall impose all quality assurance requirements upon sub-contractors,
suppliers, manufacturers and any other parties associated with the Contractor that are
involved in the Project.
8.1.6
Failure to Perform
If the Contractor fails to adequately perform any or all of the provisions of this Part, the
Owner, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to have the Engineer perform any or all of the
provisions of this Section and charge the Contractor for the actual cost of such work.
8.2
SUBMITTALS
8.2.1
The Contractor shall prepare the necessary Contract specific Project Quality Plan as
specified in this part, the Contract Documents and as a minimum meeting the requirements
ISO 9001 and ISO 10005 and submit them to the Engineer for review and approval within 30
days of the award of Contract. The Contractor is not permitted to Work on the worksite until
such time as the plans has been approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall regularly review the suitability of the Quality Plans. The Contractor shall
undertake a full formal review of the quality plans annually with reference to the date of
award of the Contract and submit the findings of the review to the Engineer within 14 days of
that date along with an amended plan should any amendments be required.
The Project Quality Plan shall describe the Contractors Quality Management System that
will be used throughout the Contract and the contents shall include but not be limited to the
following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
(s)
(t)
(u)
(v)
(w)
(x)
(y)
(z)
(aa)
(bb)
Front Cover
Table of Contents
Project Scope, Requirements and Quality Objectives
Quality Policy and ISO 9001 Certificate (if applicable)
Control of Project Quality Plan
Reference Documentation
Project Management, Planning and Resources
Management, Organisation and Responsibilities
Contract Review
Project Deliverables
Communication with the Engineer
Management of Documents, Data and Records
Design (Including Temporary Works)
Procurement of Services, Equipment and Materials
Method Statements
Inspection and Test
Product Identification and Traceability
Owner Supplied Product
Handling, Storage, Packaging and Delivery
Nonconformance, Corrective and Preventative Action
Control of Inspection, Measuring and Test Equipment
Audits
Training
Key Performance Indicators and Continual Improvement
Management Review
Quality Meetings
Monthly Quality Report
Commissioning
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 6
(c)
(d)
(i)
(j)
(k)
4
No construction shall begin and no requests for payment from the Contractor shall be
processed until the Contractors Quality Assurance Plan is approved.
A Contractors Project Quality Plan Template with guidance notes is included in Appendix A
of this Part.
8.2.2
The Contractor shall submit a Quality Organisation Plan to the Engineer for approval no later
than thirty (30) days from the start of the Contract.
The Quality Organisation Plan shall provide the names, qualifications, experience and skills
of all the QA/QC Team and key support staff.
The Quality Organisation Plan shall show the organisation of Contractors quality team and
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
The Quality Organisation Plan should also define quality responsibilities of any of the
Contractors team with responsibilities under the Contractors Project Quality Plan.
The Contractors Quality staff shall have relevant educational and professional qualifications,
training and the ability to communicate in multiple languages. The Contractor is not
permitted to execute any form of the works at the worksite until such time as approved
quality personnel have been deployed on a fulltime basis to the worksite. The Contractor
shall not remove or replace the appointed quality personnel without prior approval from the
Engineer.
The Quality Organisation Plan may form part of the Project Quality Plan or be prepared as a
standalone document and cross-referenced within the Project Quality Plan.
QCS 2010
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 7
8.2.3
As part of the Project Quality Plan the Contractor shall submit an Inspection and Test Plan
Schedule to the Engineer for approval no later than thirty (30) days from the start of the
Contract.
The Inspection and Test Plan schedule shall define the Inspection and Test Plans to be
prepared for the Works and the target dates for their submission to the Engineer for his
approval.
The Inspection and Test Plans shall consider the requirements of each Section of the
Specification and shall identify, as a minimum, the following:
details each activity, inspection and test to be performed
reference to specifications, standards etc.
the required inspection and testing frequency
the acceptance/rejection criteria
whom from the Contractors team is responsible to perform the inspection or test
Quality Records to be generated
Hold, Witness, Patrol and Record Review points of the Contractors team, the
Engineer and any other agencies having jurisdictional authority over the work relating
to each inspection and test to be performed.
Inspection and Test Plans are required to address the Contractors on and off site Work and
preparation, submission and approval of related documentation.
Inspection and Test Plans are required for all operations including major temporary works.
No work covered by the Inspection and Test Plan shall begin until the plan has been
approved by the Engineer.
A Contractors Inspection and Test Plan Template with guidance notes is included in
Appendix B of this Part.
8.2.4
Method Statements
As part of the Project Quality Plan the Contractor shall submit a Method Statement Schedule
to the Engineer for approval no later than thirty (30) days from the start of the Contract.
The Method Statement Schedule shall define the Method Statements to be prepared for the
Works and the target dates for their submission to the Engineer for his approval.
Introduction/Scope
Location and identification of the work covered by the method statement
Permits and Licenses Required
Specific Health and Safety Issues including Risk Assessments and Job Hazard
Analysis
Environmental Issues
Quality Issues
Responsibilities
Sequence of Work
Resources
Drawings and Sketches
Reference documentation
Method Statements are required for all operations including temporary works.
QCS 2010
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 8
No work covered by the Method Statement shall begin until it has been approved by the
Engineer.
For additional requirements relating to the preparation of method statements refer to Part 10,
Occupational Health and Safety, of this Section and Section 11, Occupational Health and
Safety.
8.2.5
Commissioning Plan
The Contractor shall submit a Commissioning Plan to the Engineer for approval no later than
thirty (30) days before the start of the commissioning of the Works or any part thereof.
The Commissioning Plan shall consider the requirements of each Section of the
Specification in turn and shall identify the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
No work covered by the Commissioning Plan shall begin until the plan has been approved.
8.3
8.3.1
General
Contractor shall, throughout the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying
defects therein have on his staff at the Site office(s) a dedicated Quality Team dealing only
with matters regarding the quality and protection against damage before, during and after
execution of Works as specified in this section. This team shall be qualified and experienced
in their work and shall have the authority to issue instructions and shall take protective
measures to prevent execution of Works that do not comply with the Specifications.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing prior to re-assigning or replacement of any
of the quality team designated in the Quality Organisation Plan.
The Contractor shall have adequate quality personnel on the site during all production
operations, including adequate coverage during night shift operations and off site work.
The Contractor's quality team shall have the authority to stop any portion of the work which
does not comply with the requirements of the Project Documentation.
8.3.2
Where required by clause 8.3.7, the Contractor shall designate and assign a full time Quality
Assurance Manager who shall be responsible for overseeing the implementation and
operation of the Project Quality Plan at all levels. The Quality Assurance Manager shall
report directly to Top Tier Management and be independent of the Contractors organisation
responsible for construction.
8.3.3
Where required by clause 8.3.7, the Contractor shall designate and assign a full time Quality
Control Manager who reports directly to the Quality Assurance Manager and shall be
responsible for supervision of the construction quality control management activities and
ensuring compliance with the Contractors Inspection and Test Plans and associated
specification and contract documentation.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 9
Quality Engineer
Where required by clause 8.3.7, the Contractor shall designate and assign a Quality
Engineer who reports directly to the Quality Assurance Manager or Quality Control
Manager and shall be responsible for assisting
them with their day to day
responsibilities and may be assigned to cover several locations or areas of work relating to
the Contract. Where a Quality Assurance Manager or Quality Control Manager are not
required by clause 8.3.7 the Quality Engineer shall be assigned all the responsibilities
defined in clause 8.3.2 and 8.3.3.
8.3.5
Quality Inspector
The Contractor shall designate and assign a Quality Inspector for each shift for each location
where work is being performed. Each Quality Inspector shall be qualified by training and
experience in all the construction or fabrication activities being conducted at the location of
work and is directly responsible for ensuring compliance with the Contractors Inspection and
Test Plans and associated specification and contract documentation.
8.3.6
Personnel Qualifications
The Contractor shall identify activities requiring qualified production, inspection, and test
personnel and establish their minimum competence level.
8.3.7
Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer the Contractor shall employ fulltime qualified
quality personnel for the Work as per table 8.1.
Table 8.1 - Quality Staff Requirement
No
No of workers on Worksite
Requirement
1.
Less than 10
2.
1 Quality Inspector
3.
4.
5.
The Contractor shall appoint deputy quality personnel who are capable of performing all the
duties of the quality personnel in the event of their absence.
The Contractor shall appoint support staff in sufficient numbers to ensure the effective
function of the quality related work within the Contractors organisation.
The Contractor shall ensure that every Sub-contractor employed on the Worksite appoints
suitably qualified quality staff to ensure the effective function of the quality related issues
QCS 2010
8.3.4
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 10
within the Sub-contractors organisation. The Sub-contractor shall appoint and deploy
fulltime on the Worksite one Quality Inspector for every 100 workers that they employ at the
Worksite. Any Sub-contractor that employs more than 100 workers will appoint a Quality
Engineer. This shall be in addition to the Contractors Quality Team.
Quality Training for Contractors Employees and Labour
The Contractor shall conduct quality training including Contract specific induction, pre-work
briefings, skills training, tool box talks and formal training conducted by training professionals
or agencies for all the Contractors employees. The Contract specific induction will be at
least 1 hour duration, approved by the Engineer and provided for all persons involved in the
Works. Such induction training will be reviewed, revised and repeated at intervals not
exceeding 12 months throughout the duration of the Work. All training shall be provided in
the languages preferred by the recipients of the training. Training shall focus on improving
competency and skill for those performing activities that impact quality.
The Contractor must conduct regular tool box talks to his Labour workforce Such training
should include as a minimum Health and Safety issues and Construction Method best
practice.
The Owner may organise quality related training, meetings, seminars, workshops or similar
events at any time throughout the Contract Period. The Contractor is required to participate
in such events when requested at his own expense.
The Contractor shall maintain records of all training conducted including details of the
training given and a list of attendees, including attendees signature and ID numbers.
8.4
8.4.1
General
The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures to control all
documents and data that relate to the requirements of the Specification. Documents and
data can be in the form of any type of media, such as hard copy or electronic media.
The Contractor shall maintain up to date copies of all industry codes and standards that
apply to the Contract
8.4.2
The documents and data shall be reviewed and approved for adequacy by authorised
personnel prior to issue. A master list or equivalent document control procedure identifying
the current revision status of documents shall be established and be readily available to
preclude the use of invalid and/or obsolete documents. This control shall ensure that:
(a)
(b)
(c)
The pertinent issues of appropriate documents are available at all locations where
operations essential to the effective functioning of the quality system are performed
invalid and/or obsolete documents are promptly removed from all points of issue or
use, or otherwise assured against unintended use
Any obsolete documents retained for legal and/or knowledge preservation purposes
are suitably identified.
8.4.3
Where practicable, the nature of the change shall be identified in the document or
appropriate attachments.
QCS 2010
8.3.8
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 11
QUALITY RECORDS
8.5.1
General
The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures for identification,
collection, indexing, access, filing, storage, maintenance and disposition of quality records.
The Contractor shall supplement these quality records as necessary to monitor quality
throughout the Contract period.
All quality records shall be legible and shall be stored and retained in such a way that they
are readily retrievable in facilities that provide a suitable environment to prevent damage or
deterioration and to prevent loss.
As a minimum, the quality record for any particular item shall include:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
name of item
item number
item description
suppliers name
serial number or other identification (where applicable)
Specification reference (where applicable)
verification of receipt of all required supporting documentation
quantity of items
location and installation of item
inspection/test procedure reference
non-conformance number (if applicable)
observations / comments.
8.6
QUALITY AUDITS
8.6.1
The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures for planning and
implementing internal quality audits to verify whether quality activities and related results
comply with planned arrangements and to determine the effectiveness of the quality system.
Internal quality audits shall be scheduled on the basis of the status and importance of the
activity to be audited and shall be carried out by personnel independent of those having
direct responsibility for the activity being audited. Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer
in writing, the Contractor shall carry out a quality audit every three months.
The results of the audits shall be recorded and brought to the attention of the personnel
having responsibility in the area audited. The management personnel responsible for the
area shall take timely corrective action on deficiencies found during the audit.
Follow-up audit activities shall verify and record the implementation and effectiveness the
corrective action taken.
The results of the Contractors quality audits shall be made available for review by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall implement any recommendations made by the Engineer
based on the results of the internal audit.
The Contractor shall allow the Engineer to observe the Contractors internal audit upon
request.
QCS 2010
8.5
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 12
The Engineer may undertake a quality audit of any of the Contractors activities at any time
during the course of the Contract. The Contractor shall make all personnel and facilities
available to the Engineer as necessary to undertake quality audits.
The Engineer shall make the results of his quality audit available to the Contractor for review.
The Contractor shall implement any recommendations made by the Engineer based on the
results of the Engineers quality audit.
8.7
8.7.1
General
The Contractor shall provide equipment, instruments, qualified personnel, and facilities
necessary to inspect the work and perform the tests required by the Project Documentation.
The Contractor shall repeat tests and inspections after correcting non-conforming work until
all work complies with the requirements. All re-testing and re-inspections shall be performed
at no additional cost to the Client.
The Engineer may elect to perform additional inspections and tests at the place of the
manufacture or the shipping point to verify compliance with applicable Specifications.
Inspections and tests performed by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to meet the Specifications. Inspections and tests by the Engineer shall not be
considered a guarantee that materials delivered at a later time will be acceptable. All costs
associated with the foregoing shall be borne by the Contractor.
Inspections and tests conducted by persons or agencies other than the Contractor, shall not
in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility and obligation to meet all
Specifications and referenced standards.
8.7.2
All inspections and tests shall be conducted in accordance with written test procedures as
detailed in the Project Quality Plan and Inspection and Test Plans that have been reviewed
and approved by the Engineer.
Mandatory Products and Materials Sampling and Testing Frequencies are included in
Appendix C of this section. The Contractor shall follow the Sampling and Testing
Frequencies stipulated in Appendix C unless otherwise stated. The table in Appendix C
shall be read and understood in tandem with the footnotes in Appendix C.
Inspection and test procedures submitted for approval shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
Approved procedures and instructions shall be readily available and used by inspection and
test personnel at the time of inspection or test. All revisions to these procedures and
QCS 2010
8.6.2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 13
instructions shall be approved prior to being used to inspect or test the work. No deviations
from the approved procedures and instructions shall be allowed without written authorisation
from the Engineer.
Inspection and testing work shall be performed by personnel designated by the Contractor.
Such personnel shall not be the same as those performing the work.
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a signed and stamped inspection report for
each item of work inspected and tested. The report shall indicate whether the item of work,
material and/or equipment complies with all the inspection/test criteria. The Contractor shall
submit inspection/test results to the Engineer prior to incorporating the item(s) into the work.
Inspection/test failures shall be reported to the Engineer immediately.
The Contractor shall clearly document and identify the inspections and test status of
all materials and equipment throughout construction. Identification may be by means of
stamps, tags, or other control devices attached to, or accompanying, the material or
equipment.
8.7.3
The inspection and test status of materials, equipment and construction work shall be
identified by suitable means, which indicates the conformance or non-conformance of
materials, equipment and construction work with regard to inspection and tests performed.
The identification of inspection and test status shall be maintained, as defined in the Quality
Assurance Plan and/or documented procedures, throughout the course of construction to
ensure that only materials, equipment and construction work that have passed the required
inspections and tests are used or installed.
8.7.4
The Contractors Inspection and Test Plans will define Hold, Witness, Patrol and Record
Review points for the Engineer during construction. The contractor shall prepare, document
and implement a Request for Inspection system that defines how the Engineer will be given
sufficient notice to inspect the works in accordance with the Inspection and Test Plans.
8.7.5
The Engineer will give the Contractor due notice of his intention to carry out any inspections
during the defects liability period.
The Contractor shall arrange for a responsible representative to be present at the times and
dates named by the Engineer.
The Contractors representative shall render all necessary assistance and take note of all
matters to which his attention is directed by the Engineer.
8.7.6
Workmanship
The Contractor shall comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 14
The Contractor shall comply with manufactures published installation instructions / guides in
full, including each step in sequence.
Should instructions conflict with project
documentation, the Contractor shall request clarification from the Engineer before
proceeding.
8.7.7
The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures which conform to
accepted and approved national or international standards to control, calibrate and maintain
inspection, measuring and test equipment used by the Contractor to demonstrate the
conformance of materials, equipment and/or construction work with the requirements of the
Project Documentation.
Inspection, measuring and test equipment shall be used in a manner which ensures that the
measurement uncertainty is known and is consistent with the required measurement
capability.
The Contractor shall establish a unique identification number for each item of measuring and
test equipment. This unique identification number shall be permanently affixed to each item
of measuring and test equipment
The Contractor shall ensure that each item of inspection, measuring and test equipment is
calibrated at intervals recommended by the manufacturer. Valid calibration certificates for
measuring and testing equipment shall be present and available for inspection during
inspections and tests.
The Contractor shall establish a log of all measuring and test equipment and record:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
equipment description
identification number
date of the last calibration
date that the next calibration is due.
8.8
MATERIALS
8.8.1
All Plant, materials, goods and workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in the
Contract with necessary approvals from the concerned authorities and in accordance with
the Engineer's instructions and shall be subjected from time to time to such tests as the
Engineer may direct at the place of manufacture or fabrication or on the Site or at all or any
such places. The Contractor shall provide such assistance, instruments, machines, labour
and material as are normally required for examining, measuring and testing any work and
the quality, weight or quantity of any materials used and shall supply samples of materials
before incorporation in the Works for testing as may be selected and required by the
Engineer.
8.8.2
The Contractor shall establish procedures for handling and storage of materials and
equipment.
The Contractors storage and handling procedures shall be designed to prevent damage,
deterioration, distortion of shape or dimension, loss, degradation, loss of identification, or
substitution.
The handling procedures shall address the use, inspection and maintenance of special
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 15
devices such as crates, boxes, containers, dividers, slings, material handling and
transportation equipment and other facilities.
The Contractor shall identify equipment and/or material requiring special handling or storage.
8.8.3
The Contractor shall establish control procedures to ensure that equipment and materials
are properly used and installed.
The Contractor shall identify all items and materials so that they are traceable throughout all
inspections, test activities, and records. For stored items, the identification method shall be
consistent with the expected duration and type of storage.
The Contractor shall record equipment and material identifications and ensure that they are
traceable to the location where they are incorporated into the Works.
8.9
NONCONFORMANCE MONITORING
8.9.1
General
The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures to ensure that an item
that does not conform to the Contract prevented from unintended use or installation. This
control shall provide for identification, documentation, evaluation, segregation (when
practical) and disposition of the nonconforming item(s).
The monitoring system shall apply to material and equipment as well as installation and
construction which fails to conform to the Contract.
8.9.2
The responsibility for review and authority for the disposition of nonconforming items shall
be defined in the Quality Plan.
The proposed use or repair of an item which does not conform to the requirements of the
Project Documentation shall be reported to the Engineer. The description of the
nonconformity and of repairs shall be recorded to denote the actual condition.
Repaired and/or reworked products shall be inspected in accordance with the Quality
Assurance Plan and/or documented procedures.
8.9.3
The Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures for implementing
corrective and preventive action.
Any corrective or preventive action taken to eliminate the causes of actual or potential
nonconformities shall be to a degree appropriate to the magnitude of problems and
commensurate with the risks encountered.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 16
The Contractor shall implement and record any changes to the documented procedures for
implementing corrective and preventive action.
The Contractor shall take prompt action to identify the causes of each nonconformance and
the corrective action necessary prevent recurrence. The results of failure and discrepancy
report summaries, Contractor evaluations, and any other pertinent applicable data shall be
used for determining corrective action. Information developed during construction, tests, and
inspections that support the implementation of required improvements and corrections shall
be used to support the adequacy of corrective action taken.
(c)
(d)
8.9.4
The Contractor shall clearly identify each nonconforming item with a status tag or other
distinguishing mark. The Contractor shall establish procedures for installing, monitoring, and
removing these status tags and identify personnel authorised to remove status tags.
8.9.5
8.9.6
Nonconformance Records
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the following information for each
nonconformance:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
identification of nonconformance
description of nonconformance
evaluation of nonconformance to establish the cause
recommended corrective action
date nonconformance was identified
date corrective action was completed
description of final corrective action.
The Contractor shall establish and maintain a nonconformance log. The log shall contain
the following information as a minimum:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
QCS 2010
(b)
the use of appropriate sources of information such as processes and work operations
which affect product quality, concessions, audit results, quality records and service
reports to detect, analyse and eliminate potential causes of nonconformities
determination of the steps needed to deal with any problems requiring preventive
action
initiation of preventive action and application of controls to ensure that it is effective
ensuring that relevant information on actions taken is submitted for management
review.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 17
LABORATORIES
8.10.1
Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer in writing, the Contractor shall submit a list of
laboratories he intends to use for testing purposes during the course of the Contract to the
Engineer for approval no later than thirty (30) days from the start of the Contract.
8.10.2
Government Laboratory
The Contractor is responsible for the timely delivery of all samples and materials to the
Materials and Laboratory Division.
8.10.3
QCS terms and clauses regarding independent laboratories are obligatory and considered to
be part of the contract conditions.
The Contractor shall follow and comply with regular Circulars regarding testing and
laboratories, Quality forms, Safety forms etc. which are issued from the Owner or relevant
authorities.
The Contractor shall only engage independent laboratories from the latest approved
laboratory list issued by the Owner or relevant authorities for Quality Control purposes.
The Contractor shall ensure that copies of all testing results are sent directly from the
laboratory or testing agency to the Owner and/or to any other party specified in the Contract.
It is the full responsibility of the Contractor to assure that, project's data base and information
made available to the Owner or relevant authorities is true and updated with that existing in
the site.
The Contractor shall coordinate, accompany and cooperate with QA/QC staff during site
visits, Quality audits and report all nonconformities to the Owner. He shall also ensure that
proper records are maintained on the issuance of NCR and produce upon request by the
Owner or any other relevant authority.
The Contractor shall ensure that the Engineer or Engineers Representative shall administer
and witness the sampling and testing process, including sampling locations, collection and
transportation.
The Contractor shall ensure that the samples for testing are collected and delivered by the
appointed laboratory or under complete supervision and responsibility of the Engineer. Any
samples collected or delivered to the laboratory by the Contractor will not be considered or
approved by the Engineer.
A Field laboratory can only be used for project quality purposes, when operated by one of
the Owner approved laboratories and that satisfies the requirements specified by the Owner.
8.11
8.11.1
The Contractor shall hold Contract specific QA/QC meetings chaired by the Contractors
Representative on a monthly basis throughout the duration of the Work. The Contractor shall
QCS 2010
8.10
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 18
include QA/QC as items on the agenda for every meeting held and ensure that the subject is
actively discussed.
Monthly Quality Reports
The Contractor shall produce and submit to the Engineer a Monthly Report in the format
approved by the Engineer.
8.12
8.12.1
General
Should the Contractor not maintain acceptable quality performance then the Owner or
Engineer may, in addition to any other amounts withheld under the Contract, withhold sum of
money from the Contractor equivalent to the work which has not met the required standards.
The criteria used for determining acceptable performance are as defined the Contract and
the Engineers decision shall be final. The following items shall be taken into consideration
when assessing non-acceptable performance;
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
8.12.2
Further to Clause 8.12.1, should the Contractor not maintain acceptable quality performance
then the Owner or Engineer may impose penalties on the Contractor. A general set of
unacceptable performance criteria that may be imposed by the Owner or Engineer for poor
quality work are defined in the Table 8.2. The financial penalties for poor quality work shall
be defined within the Contract.
QCS 2010
8.11.2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 19
Penalty (QR)
_____ per
day worked
_____ per
day worked
per staff
_____ per
day worked
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
_____ per
incident
_____ per
incident
_____ per
incident
_____ per
day of delay
_____ per
instance
_____ per
instance
_____ per
instance
8.13
SUSPENSION OF WORK
8.13.1
Suspension of Work
The Contractor may be issued with stop work instructions from the Engineer for any
observed cases of serious or imminent Quality violation associated with the Work. On receipt
of a stop work instruction the Contractor shall refrain from work until such time as remedial
action has been taken to alleviate the serious or imminent Quality violation and necessary
measure put in place to prevent its reoccurrence. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the delay caused due to this stop work instruction and is not entitled to claim extension of
time.
The Contractor shall stop work if any unknown or unplanned conditions occur that give rise
to serious or imminent quality violations. In such circumstances the Contractor shall assess
the risks associated with any remedial work required and revise the method statements. The
revised method statement shall be reviewed and approved by the Contractors Quality
Manager as appropriate. Revised method statements shall be approved by the Engineer
before the recommencement of Work.
QCS 2010
No
QCS 2010
8.14
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 20
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 21
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 22
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 23
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 24
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 25
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 26
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 27
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 28
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 29
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 30
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 31
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 32
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 33
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
8.15
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 34
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
8.16
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 35
1.02
Boreholes (for
highways, bridges,
high cuts, culverts,
retaining walls etc)
Method
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Minimum 3
boreholes per site
1 borehole every
300 m2
Grid at a mutual
spacing of 20 m
Grid at a mutual
spacing of 75 m for
subgrade survey
1 3 per pier or
abutment
Minimum 3 to draw
a profile (high cuts
etc)
Grid at a mutual
spacing of 30 m for
culverts, retaining
walls etc
Remarks
The spacing
could be
halved for
irregular
conditions or
doubled for
uniform
conditions.
The Engineer
shall determine
the depth of the
borehole.
The spacing
could be
halved for
irregular
conditions or
doubled for
uniform
conditions.
The Engineer
shall determine
the depth of the
borehole.
Footnote 1: The testing frequency stipulated herein shall be mandatory unless otherwise
stated. The tests are to be conducted as per the demands of the site as applicable. The
same testing sequence and frequency shall be adopted for the recycled materials as
applicable.
Footnote 2: All testing will have to be carried out on site or at a designated laboratory
irrespective of whether the materials have been tested by the manufacturer or by an
intermediate party (such as asphalt, concrete etc supplier) or the availability of the conformity
certificates.
Footnote 3: All the reference standards and documents are listed at the end of this table for
ease of reference. [Note: Where available/applicable the ASTM version used should be the
metric edition, ie, M version (or ASTM D1234M etc).]
Footnote 4: The Contractor shall carry out the maximum number of tests, ie, whichever
condition comes first (ie, whichever is more frequent). Sampling and testing frequency may
be modified as directed by the Engineer.
5
Footnote 5: Minimum frequencies shall be deemed to include part thereof. For example; 1
test per 2000 m2 or 1 test per 50 units shall be interpreted as 1 test per 2000 m2 or part
thereof or 1 test per 50 units or part thereof etc respectively, ie, the Contractor is required
to carry out the stipulated testing for amount of work which is less than the mentioned
amount.
QCS 2010
1.00
1.01
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Method
Bentonite Slurry
Density6
2.02
API RP 13B-1
2.03
Yield Stress6
2.04
Gel Strength6
2.05
Shear Strength6
2.06
Sand Content6
2.07
API RP 13B-1, BS EN
1536
2.08
2.09
pH6
API RP 13B-1, BS EN
1536
2.10
Unit Weight7
ASTM D4380
2.11
API RP 13B-1
2.12
2.13
Gradation8
2.14
ASTM D1140
Laboratory or field test
ASTM C138, D4380
2.15
Permeability8
Weight-Volume
ASTM D5084
Laboratory test
Remarks
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 3
Stage 3
Stage 3
Footnote 6: The Contractor shall carry out these tests for Stage 1 - Initial Bentonite slurry
(ie, when the Bentonite is in the form of slurry before its use).
Footnote 7: The Contractor shall carry out these tests for Stage 2 - In-trench Bentonite
Slurry (ie, when the Bentonite is in use inside the trench).
Footnote 8: The Contractor shall carry out these tests for Stage 3 - Cement-Bentonite SoilBentonite, (backfill) material (ie, when the Bentonite has been used and recovered for reuse).
QCS 2010
2.00
2.01
Page 36
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
2.17
pH8
API RP 13B-1, BS EN
1536
2.18
API RP 13B-1, BS EN
1536
2.19
3.00
3.01
Piling
Static Load Test
3.02
Cube Test
3.03
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
3.09
Method
API RP 13B-1
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
2 tests per shift
2 tests per day
Weight-Volume
ASTM D1143, BS EN
1997-1
ASTM D7383
Minimum of 1 test
per site
1% of piles
As per concrete
testing
requirements
All the piles
ASTM D5882
10 15 % of piles
ASTM D4945
ASTM D3689
ASTM D3966
Remarks
Stage 3
Stage 3
Stage 3
Stage 3
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Footnote 9: All piles bigger than 1000 mm diameter shall be tested as per this testing
requirement (5 vertical access tubes shall be attached at constant spacing to the
reinforcement cage of the pile). For smaller diameter piles testing is to be done as per the
Engineers request (3 access tubes or as per the Engineers discretion).
10
Footnote 10: All piles bigger than 1000 mm diameter shall be tested as per this testing
requirement. For smaller diameter piles testing is to be done as per the Engineers request.
QCS 2010
2.16
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Viscosity8
Page 37
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
4.00
4.01
Method
Page 38
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test every 1000 m3
4.03
Gradation (Sieve)
Analysis14
4.04
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
11
Footnote 11: Earthworks, Subgrade (including porous, prepared etc), Base, Subbase,
Backfill (including soil-cement, structural, pipe bedding, trenching, piping, pervious, porous,
reclamation backfill etc), Sub-ballast, Common fill, Select fill, Technical fill, Embankment fill,
Rock fill, Sabkha rock fill, Gravel, Granular Base (for pavers of all kinds), Setting Bed (for
pavers of all kinds) etc and/or products and materials conforming to ASTM D2940 or
equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirement where applicable.
12
Footnote 12: Concrete specifications, testing procedures and frequencies shall be adopted
for concrete and concrete related backfill.
13
Footnote 13: The same testing frequency is to be followed for related backfill works such
as manholes, chambers, thrust blocks, skip shaft etc.
14
Footnote 14: Aggregate gradation standards are included to cater for pervious, porous etc
backfill.
QCS 2010
4.02
Earthworks,
Subgrade, Base,
Subbase, Backfill,
Sub-ballast etc11, 12
(Modified) Proctor
Test - [Optimum
Moisture Content
(OMC) & Maximum
Dry Density (MDD)]
Field Density & Field
Moisture Content
[also known as
(Field) Compaction
Test]13
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
4.05
4.06
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Shape (Flakiness
Index & Elongation
Index)15
Also known as
Fractured Faces
4.07
Water Soluble
Sulphate or Acid
Soluble Sulphate as
applicable14
4.08
Water Soluble
Chloride or Acid
Soluble Chloride as
applicable14
4.09
Organic Matter
Content
4.10
Sand Equivalent
4.11
Los Angeles
Abrasion or
Aggregate Abrasion
Value as applicable
4.12
Linear Shrinkage of
Soil
AASHTO T92, BS
1377-2
4.13
pH of Soil
BS 1377-3
15
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test every 5000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test every 5000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test every 5000 m3
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test every 5000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test every 5000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test every 5000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test every 1000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test every 1000 m3
Footnote 15: 1 test here refers to 1 pair of tests, ie, 1 test each for Flakiness Index and
Elongation Index and/or Fractured Faces as applicable
QCS 2010
Method
AASHTO T304, ASTM
C1252, D5821, BS
812-105.2, BS EN
933-3, BS EN 933-4
(ASTM D3398, D4791
may also be used as
applicable)
AASHTO T104, ASTM
Soundness (or
Magnesium Sulphate C88, BS 812-121, BS
EN 1367-2
Test as applicable)
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Every change in Job
Mix Formula (JMF)
1 test every 5000 m3
Page 39
QCS 2010
4.14
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Allowable Bearing
Capacity [California
Bearing Ratio (CBR)
test together with the
swell criteria]16
Quality Assurance
Method
AASHTO T193, ASTM
D1883, D4429,
BS1377-4, BS1377-9
4.16
4.17
4.18
Allowable Bearing
Capacity (Cone
Penetrometer Test)16
Allowable Bearing
Capacity (Plate Load
Test)16
Layer Thickness
Verification (Trial Pit)
Refer to Soil
Investigation Section
4.19
4.20
4.21
Lightweight Pieces
(or Particles) - This
includes coal lignite,
chert etc.17
Moisture Density
Relations (for SoilCement Mixtures etc)
as applicable
ASTM D558
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
16
Footnote 16: The Contractor may carry out any one of the tests deemed suitable for the site
in consultation with the Engineer. The tests are to be repeated separately for each final layer,
ie, subgrade, subbase etc.
17
Footnote 17: For aggregates used in the pervious, porous backfill etc as applicable.
QCS 2010
4.15
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
(laboratory testing)
(Visible) Change in
material (laboratory
testing)
1 test every 5000 m3
(laboratory testing)
and 1 test every
3000 m2 on the final
layer (in-situ testing)
Minimum of 3 tests
per site
1 test every 3000 m2
after compaction of
the final layer
Minimum of 3 tests
per site
1 test every 3000 m2
on the final layer
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test every 5000 m3
Minimum of 3 tests
per site
1 test every 3000 m2
after compaction of
the final layer
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test every 5000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material or gradation
1 test every 1000 m3
Each source
Visible change in
gradation
1 test every 1000 m3
Page 40
QCS 2010
Section 1
4.26
Moisture Content
4.27
4.22
4.23
4.24
4.28
4.29
4.30
Carbonate Content
of Soil
4.31
Shear Strength by
Direct Shear (Small
Shear Box)
Expansion of
Aggregates from
Hydration Reactions
4.32
Quality Assurance
Page 41
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Method
ASTM D1632, D1633
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D4792
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
18
Footnote 18: Should the Engineer decide to conduct any of these tests, the frequency of
testing shall be 2 sets per class per day (each set consisting of 2 specimens each for 7, 28
and 90 day testing).
19
Footnote 19: Should the Engineer decide to conduct any of these tests, the frequency of
testing shall be 2 sets per class per day (each set consisting of 2 specimens for 28 day
testing).
QCS 2010
4.25
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Compressive
Strength - SoilCement Mixtures
etc18
Immersed
Compressive
Strength - SoilCement Mixtures
etc19
Tensile Strength Soil-Cement
Mixtures etc18
Water Absorption17
Part 8
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
4.37
Consolidation Test
4.38
Permeability
4.39
4.40
Vane Shear in
Cohesive Soil
Frost Heave
4.41
Soil Resistivity
4.42
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
Point Load Strength
Index of Rock21
(Also known as
Crushing Strength)
Compressive
Strength and Elastic
Moduli of Intact
Rock21
(Also known as
Crushing Strength)
4.33
4.34
4.35
4.43
4.44
Page 42
Method
ASTM E2583
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
BS 812-124
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM G57, BS 1377-3 As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D2166, BS
As per the
1377-7
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
ASTM D7012
As per the
Engineers request
Sampling to be done in
accordance with ASTM
D4543 or equivalent
Refer to
footnote
ASTM D5731
20
Footnote 20: Should the Engineer decide to conduct any of these tests, the frequency of
testing shall be Minimum of 3 tests per site or 1 test every 3000 m2 after compaction of final
layer whichever comes first.
21
Footnote 21: Should the Engineer decide to conduct any of these tests, the frequency of
testing shall be Minimum of 3 tests per site or 1 test every 1000 m2 whichever comes first.
QCS 2010
4.36
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Layer Thickness
Verification (Light
Weight Deflector
(LWD)20
Layer Thickness
Verification (Ground
Penetrating Radar)20
Layer Thickness
Verification (Cone
Penetrometer Test)20
Micro Deval17
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
4.45
4.46
4.48
4.49
4.50
4.51
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Cement Bound
Granular Mixtures &
Soil Treated by
Cement
(Hydraulically Bound
Mixtures)
Soil Treated by Lime
(Unbound and
Hydraulically Bound
Mixtures)
Slag Bound Mixtures
& Soil Treated by
Slag (Hydraulically
Bound Mixtures)
Hydraulic Road
Binder Bound
Mixtures & Soil
Treated by Hydraulic
Road Binder
(Hydraulically Bound
Mixtures)
Fly Ash Bound
Mixtures, Fly Ash for
Hydraulically Bound
Mixtures & Soil
Treated by Fly Ash
(Hydraulically Bound
Mixtures)
Alpha Coefficient of
Vitrified Blast
Furnace Slag
Clay Liner Plates
QCS 2010
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 14227-1, BS
EN 14227-10
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 14227-11
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 14227-2, BS
EN 14227-12
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 14227-5, BS
EN 14227-13
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 14227-3, BS
EN 14227-4, BS EN
14227-14
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 13286-44
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C479
As per the
Engineers request
Page 43
Remarks
4.47
Section 1
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
5.00
Quality Assurance
Method
Page 44
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Aggregates
Coarse, Fine,
Mineral Filler,
Lightweight etc22, 23,
24, 25
Gradation (Sieve)
Analysis
5.02
5.03
5.04
Lightweight Pieces
(or Particles)
This includes coal
lignite, chert etc
Each source
Visible change in
gradation
Every change in Job
Mix Formula (JMF)
1 test daily
1 test every 1000 m3
Each source
Visible change in
gradation
1 test daily
1 test every 1000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000 m3
22
Footnote 22: Aggregates which are to be used for concrete, asphalt, masonry (ASTM
C144) and tiling work, Shotcrete, track ballast, grout, masonry grout (ASTM C404) etc as
applicable. The testing shall be carried out separately for each separate material or item (ie,
coarse, fine etc) and the frequency of testing adhered to in each case mutually.
23
Footnote 23: This includes dune sand, washed sand, air-cooled blast furnace slag
aggregate, lightweight aggregate, crushed materials which are used for the above listed or
similar purposes.
24
Footnote 24: Where applicable this testing frequency is to be used for rock, bolder etc
testing, or when rocks are used as backfill material as in shoreline etc works.
25
Footnote 25: Sampling shall be done in accordance with AASHTO T2, T248, ASTM C50,
C702, D75, D3665, BS EN 932-1 or equivalent as applicable.
QCS 2010
5.01
QCS 2010
5.05
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Organic Impurities
Quality Assurance
Method
AASHTO T21, T71,
ASTM C40, C87, BS
EN 1744-1
5.06
Sand Equivalent
Specific Gravity
(Apparent) or Bulk
Specific Gravity or
Unit Weight (Bulk
Density) or Particle
Density or Relative
Density as applicable
Loose Bulk Density
and Voids
BS EN 1097-3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test daily
1 test every 1000 m3
5.10
Moisture Content or
Water Content as
applicable
5.11
Shell Content
BS EN 933-7
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000 m3
5.08
5.09
QCS 2010
Each source
Change in material
1 test daily
1 test every 1000 m3
Remarks
5.07
Water Absorption
(Saturated Surface
Dry)
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test monthly
1 test every 16000
m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test daily
1 test every 1000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000 m3
for each fine
aggregate type
1 test every 4000 m3
for bituminous
paving courses or
mixtures (the total
amount)
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test daily
1 test every 1000 m3
Page 45
QCS 2010
5.12
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Shape (Flakiness
Index & Elongation
Index)
Also known as
Fractured Faces
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
AASHTO T304, ASTM
C1252, D5821, BS
812-105.1, BS 812105.2, BS EN 933-3,
BS EN 933-4
(ASTM D3398, D4791
may also be used as
applicable)
Water Soluble
Sulphate or Acid
Soluble Sulphate as
applicable
5.14
Water Soluble
Chloride or Acid
Soluble Chloride as
applicable
5.15
5.16
Los Angeles
Abrasion or
Aggregate Abrasion
Value as applicable
5.17
BS 812-111, BS EN
1097-2
5.18
Aggregate Impact
Value
BS 812-112, BS EN
1097-2
QCS 2010
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000 m3
Remarks
1 test here
refers to 1 pair
of tests, ie, 1
test each for
Flakiness
Index and
Elongation
Index and/or
Fractured
Faces as
applicable
5.13
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Every change in Job
Mix Formula (JMF)
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000 m3
Page 46
QCS 2010
5.19
5.20
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Aggregate Crushing
Value
Drying Shrinkage
Quality Assurance
Method
BS 812-110, BS EN
1097-2
BS EN 1367-4
5.21
5.22
Potential Reactivity
(Alkali-Silica, AlkaliCarbonation,
Cement-Aggregate
combination etc)
Plasticity Index
5.25
Density - Lightweight
Aggregates
ASTM C330, BS EN
13055-1, BS EN
13055-2
5.26
ASTM C330, BS EN
13055-1, BS EN
13055-2
5.24
QCS 2010
Remarks
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000 m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test yearly
1 test every 200000
m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test monthly
1 test every 16000
m3
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000 m3
1 test every 4000 m3
(in the case of
combined aggregate
for bituminous
paving courses etc
as applicable)
Each source
(Visible) Change in
material
Every change in Job
Mix Formula (JMF)
1 test weekly
1 test every 4000
m3
Each source
Change in material
1 test per month
Each source
Change in material
1 test per month
Page 47
QCS 2010
5.27
5.28
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Constituents of
Coarse Recycled
Aggregates26
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 933-11
5.30
pH Value
BS 1377-3
5.31
Methylene Blue
Value
Micro Deval
Coefficient
BS EN 933-9
5.32
5.33
Iron Staining
5.34
Surface Moisture
Content in Fine
Aggregate
(Chapman Flask)
Chemical Analysis of
Limestone,
Quicklime, and
Hydrated Lime
Petrographic
Analysis
5.35
5.36
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
Change in material
1 test per month
Each source
Change in material
1 test per month
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C295, BS EN
932-3
As per the
Engineers request
Grouts27
6.01
Mix Proportion
BS EN 445
6.02
Fresh Density
BS EN 445
Refer to
footnote
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C25
6.00
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
5.29
Influence of
BS EN 1744-6
Recycled Aggregate
Extract on the Initial
Setting Time of
Cement26
Polished Stone Value BS EN 1097-8
Page 48
Refer to
footnote
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25m3
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
26
Footnote 26: In the case of use of Recycled Aggregates, this test is to be carried out in
addition to the tests (physical & chemical properties) stipulated for the normal aggregates as
per this section requirement.
27
Footnote 27: All grouts including Portland cement non-shrink grouts (used for pressure
grouting, semi-precast construction, prestressing construction etc) and/or products
conforming to BS EN 447 or equivalent shall be tested in accordance with this section
requirement as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
6.03
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Fluid Density (Cone
Method)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 445
6.04
Bleeding Test
6.05
Volume Change,
Vertical Shrinkage
(Change in Height),
Expansion/Shrinkage
Compressive
ASTM C109, C942, BS
Strength Test
EN 196-1, BS EN 445
Workability
BS EN 13395-1, BS
EN 13395-2, BS EN
13395-3, BS EN
13395-4
Ground Granulated
Refer to Cement
Blast-Furnace Slag
Section
Flow Consistency
ASTM C939, C1437,
BS 4551
Final Set)
196-3
days)
6.05
6.06
6.07
6.08
6.09
6.10
6.11
QCS 2010
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Refer to Cement
Section
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Each mix
Change in mix
1 test per 25 m3
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Remarks
ASTM C940, BS EN
445
Page 49
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
7.00
Quality Assurance
Method
Page 50
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Bituminous
(Asphalt) Concrete
Pavement, Prime
Coat, Bitumen etc28,
29, 30, 31
ASTM D2950
7.02
ASTM D3549, BS EN
12697-29, BS EN
12697-36
Refer to
footnote
28
Footnote 28: The terms Bitumen and/or Asphalt refers to any material with the similar
characteristic as the common bitumen and/or asphalt [All types of Base Course (BC),
Intermediate Course (IC), Service Course (SC), Wearing Course etc, Bitumen Binder of all
types]. Hence all tests mentioned regarding bitumen and/or asphalt shall be carried out for
any material with the similar characteristics as bitumen and/or asphalt at the specified
frequency.
29
Footnote 29: Bitumen testing will have to be carried out by the Contractor at the specified
frequency, irrespective of the fact whether the same tests have been carried out by the
bitumen manufacturer or supplier.
30
Footnote 30: Sampling of material and preparation of samples shall be in accordance with
AASHTO T2, T40, T168, T248, ASTM C702, D140, D979, BS EN 58 (BS 2000-474), BS EN
12594 (BS 2000-461), BS EN 12697-27, BS EN 12697-28, BS EN 12697-29, BS EN 1269730, BS EN 12697-33 or equivalent as applicable.
31
Footnote 31: Materials conforming to Asphalt Binder (ASTM D946), Prime Coat Cutback
Asphalt Slow Curing Type (ASTM D2026), Medium Curing Type (AASHTO M82, ASTM
D2027), Rapid Curing Type (AASHTO M81, ASTM D2028), Tack Coat Emulsified Asphalt
(AASHTO M140, ASTM M208, D977, D2397, BS 434-1), Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement
(AASHTO M226, ASTM D3381), Penetration Graded Asphalt Cement (AASHTO M20), Prime
Coat, Bitumen Binder of all penetration grades, Paving Grade Bitumens (BS EN 12591),
Hard Paving Grade Bitumens (BS EN 13924), Cutback Bitumen (BS EN 15322), Polymer
Modified Bitumens (BS EN 14023), Oxidised Bitumens (BS EN 13304), Hard Industrial
Bitumens (BS EN 13305) etc or equivalent as applicable.
32
Footnote 32: 1 test (or 1 sample) refers to a pair of adjacent cores (150 mm diameter for
intermediate and base course and 100 mm diameter for wearing course). If asphalt is layed
in two or more layers for any of the course, the coring and testing shall be completed for the
first layer before the commencement of asphalt laying for the subsequent layer(s).
QCS 2010
7.01
QCS 2010
7.03
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Extraction and
Gradation of
Bituminous Concrete
Mix and
Determination of
Binder Content (or
Asphalt Content)
Also known as
Mechanical Analysis
of Extracted
Aggregate
Maximum Specific
Gravity (GMM, ST)
7.05
Marshall Properties
of Bituminous
Concrete Mix
(Stability, Flow, Air
Voids, VMA) & Loss
of Marshall Stability
7.06
Bitumen (Prime
Coat, Tack Coat etc)
Rate of Application
7.07
Superpave Gyrator
Test
7.08
Stiffness of the
Asphalt Mix
Water Sensitivity of
the Asphalt Mix
Resistance to
Stripping (Affinity
Between Aggregate
and Bitumen)
Adhesion / Cohesion
of the Asphalt Mix
(Particle Loss of
Porous Asphalt
Specimen)
7.09
7.10
7.11
QCS 2010
Quality Assurance
Minimum
Method
Frequency4, 5
AASHTO T30, T37,
1 test per day
T164, T168, T308,
1 test per 200 t of
ASTM C136, D546,
asphalt mix
D2172, D5444, D6307,
Every change in
BS EN 933-1, BS EN
Job Mix Formula
12697-1, BS EN
(JMF)
12697-2, BS EN
12697-39
3
ASTM D2041, BS EN
12697-5
AI MS-2, AASHTO
T166, T209, T245,
T269, T275, ASTM
D1188, D2041, D2726,
D3203, D6926, D6927,
BS EN 12697-5, BS
EN 12697-6, BS EN
12697-8, BS EN
12697-29, BS EN
12697-34, BS EN
12697-35
ASTM D2995
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 3000 m2
of bitumen sprayed
AASHTO T312, ASTM As per the
D6925, BS EN 12697Engineers request
31
BS EN 12697-26
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 12697-12
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 12697-11
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 12697-17
As per the
Engineers request
Page 51
Remarks
7.04
Section 1
QCS 2010
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.16
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Binder Drainage of
the Asphalt Mix
Resistance to
Fatigue Asphalt
Mix
Deformation
Resistance Wheel
Tracking Rate
Penetration of
Bitumen &
Penetration of
Residue (Also known
as Needle
Penetration)
Flash Point of
Bitumen
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 12697-18
BS EN 12697-24
BS 598-110, BS EN
12697-22
Solubility of Bitumen
7.18
Ductility of Bitumen
AASHTO T51, ASTM
& Ductility of Residue D113, BS EN 13589
7.19
QCS 2010
Remarks
As per the
Engineers request
7.17
7.20
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Page 52
7.15
Section 1
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
It is sufficient to
carry out either
TFOT or
RTFOT.
It is sufficient to
carry out either
TFOT or
RTFOT.
QCS 2010
7.21
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Softening Point of
Bitumen (Ring &
Ball) Temperature
Susceptibility
Quality Assurance
Method
AASHTO T53, ASTM
D36, BS EN 1427
7.22
Kinematic Viscosity
of Bitumen
7.23
Determination of
Water in Bitumen
7.24
Distillation (Total
Distillate & Asphaltic
Residue)
ASTM D402
7.25
Asphalt Emulsion
Test for Tack Coat
Emulsified Asphalt
7.26
Compaction and
Shear Properties of
Bituminous Mixtures
Effect of Water on
Compressive
Strength of
Bituminous Mixtures
(Also known as Loss
of Stability Test)
Layer Thickness
Verification (Falling
Weight
Deflectometer FWD)33
ASTM D3387
As per the
Engineers request
Minimum of 3 tests
per site
1 test every 3000
m2 after compaction
of the final layer
Minimum of 3 tests
per site
1 test every 3000
m2 after compaction
of the final layer
7.27
7.28
7.29
Layer Thickness
Verification (Ground
Penetrating Radar)33
33
Remarks
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
Each batch
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
As per the
Engineers request
Page 53
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Footnote 33: The Contractor may carry out any one of the tests deemed suitable for the
site in consultation with the Engineer.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
7.30
7.31
7.32
7.34
7.35
7.36
7.37
7.38
7.39
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Layer Thickness
Verification (Trial
Pit)34
Layer Thickness
Verification (Cone
Penetrometer Test)34
Layer Thickness
(Volumetric Patch
Technique)34
Layer Thickness
Verification (Light
Weight Deflector
(LWD)34
International
Roughness Index IRI (Ride Quality)
using Multi Laser
Profiler (MLP)
Ride Quality,
Smoothness (using
3m straight edge)
Quality Assurance
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
BS EN 13036-1
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
ASTM E2583
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
AASHTO R40, BS
8420, BS EN 13036-7
1 test every 15 m
per lane
(longitudinal and
transverse)
Method
BS 5930 or In situ test
method approved by
the Engineer
ASTM D3441, D5778,
BS 1377-7
34
Page 54
Measurements
are to be taken
longitudinally
and
transversely
Specific for
elastomer or
blend of
elastomerplastomer
polymers
Footnote 34: Should the Engineer decide to conduct any of these tests, the frequency of
testing shall be Minimum of 3 tests per site or 1 test every 3000 m2 after compaction of the
final layer whichever comes first.
QCS 2010
7.33
Section 1
QCS 2010
7.40
7.41
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Accelerated Aging
Using Pressure
Aging Vessel (PAV)
for Modified Bitumen
Effects of LongTerm Ageing
Flexural Creep
Stiffness of Modified
Bitumen Bending
Beam Rheometer
(BBR)
Also known as Low
Temperature
Flexibility
Fracture Properties
of Modified Bitumen
Direct Tension Test
(DTT)
Quality Assurance
Method
AASHTO R28, ASTM
D6521, BS EN 14769
(BS 2000-535)
Each source
Each batch
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Specific for
plastomer type
polymers
It is sufficient to
carry out either
BBR or DTT.
AASHTO T314
Each source
Each batch
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Specific for
plastomer type
polymers
It is sufficient to
carry out either
BBR or DTT.
Rheological
Properties of
Modified Bitumen
Dynamic Shear
Rheometer (DSR)
7.44
Storage Stability of
Modified Bitumen
7.45
Dynamic Viscosity of
Bitumen
7.46
Flash Point by
Pensky-Martens
Specific Gravity of
Semi-Solid
Bituminous Material
(Pycnometer
Method)
Rate of Spread of
Coated Chippings
Viscosity - Bitumen,
Asphalt (Vacuum
Capillary Viscometer,
Saybolt, Saybolt
Fural, Cone & Plate)
7.48
7.49
QCS 2010
Remarks
Specific for
plastomer type
polymers
7.43
7.47
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
Each batch
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
Page 55
BS 598-1
AASHTO T202, ASTM
D88, D2171, D3205,
E102
Each source
Each batch
Change in material
1 test per 500 t of
bitumen
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
7.42
Section 1
QCS 2010
7.50
7.51
7.52
7.54
7.55
7.56
7.57
7.58
7.59
7.60
7.61
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Sealants and Fillers
for Joints and Cracks
in Pavements
Quality Control for
Asphalt
Manufacturing Plants
Requirements for
Agencies Testing and
Inspecting Road and
Paving Materials
Spot Test of Asphaltic
Materials
Determination of
Cement Content in
Cement-Treated
Aggregate
Testing Lime for
Chemical
Constituents and
Particle Sizes
Temperature
Measurement Asphalt Mix
Resistance to Plastic
Flow
Determination of a
Volatile Distillate
Fraction - Cold
Asphalt Mixtures
Moisture or Volatile
Distillates Bituminous Paving
Mixtures
Asphalt Content Bituminous Mixtures
by the Nuclear
Method
Accelerated
Weathering Bituminous Materials
35
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM D5329
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D4561
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D3666
As per the
Engineers request
AASHTO T102
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
AASHTO T211
AASHTO T219
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 12697-13
Each Truck35
ASTM D5581
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D6627
ASTM D1461
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D4125
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Page 56
Remarks
7.53
Section 1
Refer to
footnote
Footnote 35: The temperature of the hot asphalt shall be measured for each truck load
before the asphalt is deposited into the hopper. The temperature for the same asphalt truck
load shall be checked again before the compaction (ie, after it has been through the feeder
and on the ground ready for compaction).
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
8.00
8.02
Bend Test
8.03
Re-bend Test
8.04
Chemical
Composition
8.05
Mechanical
Couplers, Splices for
Reinforcement Bars
8.06
Welded Fabric38
8.07
Rib Geometry
8.08
Method
Page 57
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
1 test per 30 t (3
test pieces per
diameter)
8.01
Reinforcing Steel,
Couplers, Welded
Fabric36, 37
Tensile Test
Quality Assurance
1 test per 30 t (1
test pieces per
diameter)
1 test per 30 t (1
test pieces per
diameter)
1 test per 100 t (2
test pieces)
Refer to
footnote
36
Footnote 36: Reinforcement bars (BS 4482, 4483 etc), coils etc shall be tested as per this
section requirement.
37
Footnote 37: All the mandatory testing will have to be carried out by the Contractor at the
specified frequency, irrespective of the fact whether the same tests have been carried out by
the steel manufacturer or supplier and whether the mill certificate is available or not.
38
Footnote 38: These tests will have to be carried out in addition to the tests stipulated for
steel bars (and the stipulated frequency) as per this section requirement.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
8.09
8.10
9.00
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Hardness (Brinell,
Rockwell,
Indentation) - Metallic
Materials
Tests for Stainless
Steel Bars
Quality Assurance
Minimum
Method
Frequency4, 5
ASTM E10, E18, E110, As per the
BS EN ISO 6506-1, BS
Engineers request
EN ISO 6508-1
3
BS 6744
Remarks
As per the
Engineers request
9.01
9.02
Chemical Analysis
9.03
Hardness
ASTM A370, BS EN
10025-1
Footnote 39: Materials conforming to ASTM A36 or equivalent shall be tested as per this
section requirement.
QCS 2010
Refer to
footnote
Structural Steel,
Welding39
Tensile
39
Page 58
QCS 2010
9.04
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Notched Bar Impact
Test (Also known as
Charpy Pendulum
Impact Test or
Charpy V-notch
Test)40
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM E23, ASTM
9.06
9.07
9.08
9.09
9.10
BS 131-1
AWS D1.1, BS EN
12517-1, BS EN
15617, BS EN ISO
10863, BS EN ISO
11666, BS EN ISO
17640, BS EN ISO
22825, BS EN ISO
23279
Radiographic, Digital AWS D1.1, BS EN
Radiographic Test41 - 1435, BS EN 12517-2,
BS EN ISO 10893-6,
Welds
BS EN ISO 10893-7
Magnetic Particle
AWS D1.1, ASTM
E125, E1444, BS EN
Test42 - Welds
ISO 9934-1, BS EN
ISO 17638, BS EN
ISO 23278
AWS D1.1, ASTM
Penetrating Test,
42
E165, BS EN 571-1,
Liquid Penetrant BS EN ISO 3059, BS
Welds
EN ISO 23277
Visual Test - Fusion
AWS D1.1, BS EN ISO
Welding
17637
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
20% of welded
length
Refer to
footnote
20% of welded
length
Refer to
footnote
20% of welded
length
Refer to
footnote
100% of welded
length
40
Footnote 40: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM A673 or equivalent as
applicable.
41
Footnote 41: It is sufficient for the Contractor to carry out either the Ultrasonic Test or the
Radiographic Test, whichever is deemed suitable for the site in consultation with the
Engineer. It may be better to choose Ultrasonic Test for structural steel. The Engineer has
the right to choose the testing frequency specified in any of the relevant codes.
42
Footnote 42: It is sufficient for the Contractor to carry out either the Magnetic Particle Test
or the Penetrating Test, whichever is deemed suitable for the site in consultation with the
Engineer. It may be better to choose Magnetic Particle Test for Carbon Steel. The Engineer
has the right to choose the testing frequency specified in any of the relevant codes.
QCS 2010
9.05
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 20 t for
hot rolled products
1 test per 40 t for
cast products
1 test per 60 t for
heavy sections
(>100 kg / m)
1 test per 80 t for
sections / products
greater than 200 t
As per the
Engineers request
20% of welded
length
Page 59
QCS 2010
9.11
9.12
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Automated
Ultrasonic Test Welded Seam of
Steel Tubes
Welding Procedure
Test
9.15
9.16
9.17
9.14
9.18
9.19
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN ISO 10893-11
BS EN ISO 15614-1,
15614-2, 15614-3,
15614-4, 15614-5,
15614-6, 15614-7,
15614-8, 15614-10,
15614-11, 15164-12,
15614-13
ASTM E190
As per the
Engineers request
43
Remarks
Welded
Coupon
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN ISO 4136
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN ISO 5173
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN ISO 9016
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN ISO 9015-1, BS As per the
EN ISO 9015-2
Engineers request
BS EN 1321
As per the
Engineers request
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
100% of welded
length
Page 60
9.13
Section 1
Refer to
footnote
Footnote 43: Materials and products conforming ASTM A416, A421, A722, ACI 318, BS
5896 or equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirement.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
10.03 Bond Strength 15.24-mm Diameter
Steel Prestressing
Strand
10.04 Bending, Hardness Steel Rods, Strands
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM A981
BS EN 524-1
BS EN 524-2
BS EN 524-4
BS EN 524-5
BS EN 524-6
10.12 Anchorages
As per relevant
standards
10.13 Couplers
As per relevant
standards
ASTM A370, BS 4449,
BS EN ISO 15630-1
ASTM E9
QCS 2010
Minimum
Remarks
Frequency4, 5
1 test for each reel
of strand
1 test per 1000 m of
strand
1 test for each reel
of wire or strand
1 test per 1000 m of
wire or strand
1 test per 30 t for
each rod size
1 test for each reel
of wire or strand
1 test per 1000 m of
wire or strand
1 test per 30 t for
each rod size
1 test shall
1 test per 7000 m
comprise of 3
length
samples
1 test shall
1 test per 7000 m
comprise of 3
length
samples
1 test shall
1 test per 7000 m
comprise of 3
length
samples
1 test shall
1 test per 7000 m
comprise of 3
length
samples
1 test shall
1 test per 7000 m
comprise of 3
length
samples
1
test shall
1 test per 7000 m
comprise
of 3
length
samples
1 test per 10
anchorages
1 test per 60
couplers
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM A255, E10, E18, As per the
E110, BS EN ISO
Engineers request
6506-1, BS EN ISO
6508-1
Page 61
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
10.17 Torsion Test - Wires,
Strand
10.18 Welding Test Reinforcement Bars
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
ACI 318, A938
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
11.00 Water44, 45
APHA 2540
APHA 2540
APHA 2540
APHA 2540
APHA 2540
11.07 Turbidity
APHA 2130
APHA 2710
APHA 2710
44
Footnote 44: This water testing is to be carried out for water that is recovered from the
ground due to excavations (ground water), water that is received and discharged from the
sewage treatment plant as applicable.
45
Footnote 45: The specified tests are to be carried out for each sewage treatment plant at
the specified frequency.
QCS 2010
APHA 2540
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
11.11
Page 62
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
11.12 Chloride
Quality Assurance
Method
APHA 4500-Cl
APHA 4500-Cl
APHA 4500-Cl
11.15 Sulphate
APHA 4500-SO42
11.16 Sulphide
APHA 4500-S2
11.17 Cyanides
Concentration
11.18 Phosphorus (Total)
APHA 4500-CN
APHA 4500-P
11.19 pH
APHA 4500-H+
11.20 Fluoride
APHA 4500-F
11.21 Bromide
APHA 4500-Br
APHA 2320, BS EN
11.23 Phenolphthalein
Alkalinity
11.25 Conductivity
11.26 Calcium
11.27 Magnesium
11.28 Biochemical Oxygen
Demand (BOD)
11.29 Chemical Oxygen
Demand (COD)
QCS 2010
Remarks
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per week sewage treatment
1 test per week ground water
1 test per week sewage treatment
1 test per week sewage treatment
1 test per week ground water
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
1 test per week sewage treatment
1 test per week sewage treatment
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
1 test per week sewage treatment
Page 63
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Method3
11.30 Total Organic Carbon APHA 5310
(TOC)
11.31 Ammonium Nitrogen APHA 4500-NH3
APHA 4500-NO3
APHA 4500-NO2
APHA 4500-N
APHA 4500-Norg
APHA 5530
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
APHA 4500-SiO2
11.42 Arsenic
APHA 3500-As
11.43 Selenium
APHA 3500-Se
11.44 Boron
APHA 4500-Br
11.45 Aluminium
11.46 Silicon
11.47 Strontium
APHA 3500-Sr
11.48 Sodium
APHA 3500-Na
11.49 Potassium
APHA 3500-K
11.50 Hexavalent
Chromium
11.51 Total Chromium
APHA 3500-Cr
QCS 2010
APHA 3110
Remarks
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
1 test per week sewage treatment
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
1 test per week sewage treatment
Page 64
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
APHA 9222
APHA 9222
11.54 E Coli
APHA 9223
11.55 Giardia
APHA 9711
11.56 Viruses
APHA 9510
11.57 Nematodes
(Helminth) Eggs
11.59 Microscopic
Examination
11.60 Lead
As per relevant
standards
As per relevant
standards
APHA 3500-Pb Lead
11.61 Nickel
11.62 Zinc
11.63 Cadmium
APHA 3500-Cd
Cadmium
APHA 3500-Cu
Copper
USEPA 5030C, 8015D
Refer to Soil
Investigation and
Earthworks Section
11.64 Copper
11.65 Gasoline Range
Organics (C6-C10)
11.66 Diesel Range
Organics (C11-C28)
11.67 Heavy Fraction
Range (C29-C40)
11.68 Water Analysis of
Soil or Soil Analysis
for Water
QCS 2010
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per week sewage treatment
1 test per week sewage treatment
1 test per week sewage treatment
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
1 test per week sewage treatment
1 test per week sewage treatment
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to Soil
Investigation and
Earthworks Section
Remarks
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
11.52 Total Coliform
Page 65
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Quality Assurance
Method
Page 66
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Refer to
footnote
AASHTO T106, ASTM
C109, BS EN 196-1
12.04 Consistency,
Soundness
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
46
47
Footnote 47: The testing is to be carried out on site irrespective of whether the
manufacturers certificates are available or the testing has been done by the ready-mix
concrete supplier.
48
Footnote 48: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM C183, BS EN 196-7 or
equivalent
QCS 2010
12.01 Compressive
Strength of Hydraulic
Cement (Mortars)
Remarks
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
12.08 Water Retention Masonry Cement
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 413-2
BS EN 196-6
BS 4027
ASTM C451
ASTM C452
BS 4550-3.8, BS EN
196-2
ASTM C989, BS EN
15167-1, BS EN 15167-
2
49
Minimum
Remarks
Frequency4, 5
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 250 t of
cement
Refer to
Each source
Change in material footnote
1 test per 50 t
1 test per month
Footnote 49: Where applicable testing for these materials are to be carried out in addition
to the normal tests which have already been specified in this section for cement.
QCS 2010
Page 67
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
12.18 Fly Ash or
Pulverized-Fuel Ash Chemical & Physical
Properties49
12.19 Silica Fume Chemical & Physical
Properties49
Method
ASTM C311, C618, BS
EN 450-1, BS EN 4502, BS EN 451-1, BS EN
451-2
ASTM C1240, BS EN
13263-1, BS EN 13263-
2
Page 68
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 50 t
1 test per month
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 50 t
1 test per month
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Each type
1 test per 12500
units
1 test per 1000 m2
1 test shall
Each type
comprise of 3
1 test per 12500
samples
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
1 test per 12500
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Stones, Concrete
Paving Blocks
ASTM C97, C642, BS
13.04 Density (or Specific
Each type
EN 12390-7
Gravity) - Concrete
1 test per 12500
Slab Units,
units
Dimension Stone
1 test per 1000 m2
13.05 Slip Resistance (Dry ASTM E303, BS EN
1 test shall
Each type
14231
State) - Precast
comprise of 3
1 test per 12500
Paver Units, Natural
samples
units
Stones
2
1 test per 1000 m
50
Footnote 50: Precast Concrete Paver Units (Perforated and Non-Perforated), Cement Unit
Pavers, Ferrocement Roof Slabs, Ferrocement Sunbreaker Slabs, Natural Stone Products,
Natural Stone Walkway Pavers, Slate, Dimension Stones and/or materials and products
conforming to ASTM C936, BS EN 1469, BS EN 12057, BS EN 12058, BS EN 12059 or
equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirements as applicable.
QCS 2010
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
13.06 Abrasion Resistance
- Stone Subjected to
Foot Traffic,
Dimension Stone
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM C241, C1353
ASTM C170
13.07 Compressive
Strength - Dimension
Stone
QCS 2010
ASTM C1354
BS 1881-204
BS 1881-208
BS EN 14630
Refer to Aggregates
Section
Refer to Earthworks,
Subgrade Section
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each type
1 test per 12500
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
1 test per 12500
units
1 test per 1000 m2
1 test per 100
anchorages
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
Aggregates
Section
Refer to
Earthworks,
Subgrade Section
Refer to Concrete or
Masonry section as
applicable
ASTM C99
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C1352
Refer to Concrete
or Masonry section
as applicable
ASTM C1721
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C217
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C1201
Remarks
Page 69
QCS 2010
14.00
14.01
14.02
14.03
14.05
14.06
14.07
14.08
14.09
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Surfaces for Sports
Areas, Playground
Surfacing etc51, 52
Slip Resistance
Joint Strength Synthetic Surfaces
Water Infiltration
Rate
Rotational
Resistance
Shock Absorption
Spike Resistance
Ball Roll Behaviour
Artificial Weathering
Test, Environmental
Testing
Fire Test
Quality Assurance
Page 70
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Method
BS EN 14837
BS EN 12228
BS EN 12616
BS EN 15301-1
BS EN 14808
BS EN 14810
BS EN 12234
BS EN 14836
BS 7188
15.00 Admixtures53, 54
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
14.04
Section 1
Refer to
footnote
BS EN 480-10
BS EN 480-2
BS EN 480-12
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
51
52
53
Footnote 53: Admixtures for concrete, mortar, grout, masonry etc as applicable.
Admixtures conforming to ASTM C494, C1017, BS EN 934-1, BS EN 934-2, BS EN 934-3,
BS EN 934-4, BS EN 934-5 or equivalent as applicable.
54
Footnote 54: Reference concrete, mortar, masonry for testing and sampling shall be done
in accordance with BS EN 480-1, BS EN 480-13, BS EN 934-6 or equivalent as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
15.05 Capillary Absorption
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 480-5
ASTM C233
15.07 Corrosion
Susceptibility of
Reinforcing Steel
15.08 Infrared Analysis
BS EN 480-14
BS EN 480-6
BS EN 480-11
BS EN 480-8
BS 8443
16.00 Concrete,
Shotcrete, Concrete
Pavement55, 56
16.01 Cement
Refer to Cement
Section
16.02 Aggregates (Coarse, Refer to Aggregates
Fine, Lightweight etc) Section
and Aggregate
Reactivity
16.03 Admixtures
Refer to Admixtures
Section
16.04 Water
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Page 71
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
Refer to Cement
Section
Refer to
Aggregates
Section
Refer to
Admixtures
Section
Each source
Change in material
1 test per 2000 m3
of water
1 test per month
55
56
Footnote 56: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM C823 or equivalent where
applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
16.05 Sampling Plastic
(Fresh) Concrete,
Slump Testing,
Temperature
Measurement and
Making Test
Specimens in the
Field
Quality Assurance
Method
AASHTO T23, T119,
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Slump &
Temperature - 1
test per truck
Slump &
Temperature - 1
test per 10 m3
Cube - 1 set per
mix per day (6
cubes)
Cube - 1 set per
30 m3 (6 cubes)
Temperature57 (for
mass concrete) - 1
test per 50 m2 of
concrete applied
1 test for 7 days (3
cubes)
1 test for 28 days
(2 cubes)
All the cubes
16.06 Compressive
Strength of Hardened
Concrete (Making,
Curing and Testing)
ASTM C642, BS EN
12390-7
BS EN 12350-3, 12350- As per the
4, 12350-5
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C232
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Both (7 & 28
days) tests will
have to be
carried out
Refer to
footnote
57
Footnote 57: 1 test shall refer to 3 monitoring points (ie, near the top surface, centre and
near the bottom surface of the concrete pour) per 50 m2 of concrete applied.
58
Footnote 58: The required number of samples shall be tested per test as per the relevant
specification.
QCS 2010
Page 72
QCS 2010
16.15
16.16
16.17
16.19
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Water Penetration (or
Permeability) of
Hardened Concrete58
Rapid Chloride (Ion)
Penetration (RCP) or
Chloride Migration
Test58
Sulphate Content of
Hardened Concrete58
Initial Surface
(Water) Absorption58
Chloride Ion
Concentration,
Chloride Content Hardened Concrete58
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM C803, BS EN
12390-8, DIN 1048-5
QCS 2010
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 500 m3
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
BS 1881-124
BS 1881-208
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
BS 1881-204
BS 5212-3
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
Each Type
Each source
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
BS 2499-3
16.24 Hot-Applied Joint
Sealant Systems for
Concrete Pavements
16.25 Unit Weight Test
(Density) of Fresh
Concrete
16.26 Strain Measurement
- Hardened Concrete
16.27 Depth of Carbonation
- Cores or Broke (on
Concrete)
16.28 Core Compressive
Strength
16.29 Cement Content of
Hardened Concrete
16.30 Half-cell Potential Hardened Concrete,
Reinforcement
Primer
Page 73
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
16.18
Section 1
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
16.31 Particle Coating
Method
AASHTO T195, ASTM
D2489
ASTM G109
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C856
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 12390-6
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 12390-5
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C1583
ASTM C900
ASTM C1293
Remarks
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
17.02 Reflectance,
Pigments - Curing
Compound
ASTM E1347
59
Page 74
Quality Assurance
Each Type
Each source
Change in
material
Each Type
Each source
Change in
material
Footnote 59: Products conforming to AASHTO M148, M182, ASTM C171, C309, C1315 or
equivalent shall be tested in accordance with this section as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
17.03 Drying Time - Curing
Compound
Method
AASHTO M148, ASTM
C150, C309, BS 7542
ASTM C882
ASTM D1475
ASTM D1644
AASHTO M182
17.09 Supplementary
Strength Tests to
Verify Adequacy of
Curing
As Directed by the
Engineer
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each Type
Each source
Change in
material
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Each Type
Change in
material
Each Type
Change in
material
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to Cement
Refer to Cement
Section
Section
Refer to Masonry,
Refer to Masonry,
Mortar Section
Mortar Section
Methods to be proposed Frequency to be
by the Contractor based
proposed by the
on mortar type(s) and
Contractor based
procedure(s); for
on mortar type(s)
Engineers approval
and procedure(s);
for Engineers
approval
In addition to the
above, the mortar
Sampling and
Testing Programme
to be proposed by
the Contractor based
on mortar type(s)
and procedure(s); for
Engineers approval
18.04 Welding Test AWS D1.4
Reinforcement Bars
QCS 2010
Page 75
Quality Assurance
As per the
Engineers request
Proposed
program to
include flow
and strength
testing
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Method
Page 76
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Refer to Geo-textiles
section
Refer to Geo-textiles
section
60
Footnote 60: The testing is to be carried out for all waterproofing works such as tunnels,
mined tunnels, building foundations, roofing, bridge-deck etc whether new construction or
repair of existing structures.
61
Footnote 61: The products such as Bonded Membrane, Unbonded Membrane, Butyl
Rubber Sheeting, Thermoplastic Membrane (PVC), Composite (Self-Adhering) Membrane
Sheeting, Flexible Cementitious and Non-Cementitious Membrane, Bituminous Type, Asphalt
Primer (ASTM D41), Mastic Asphalt (BS EN 12970), Polymer Modified Bituminous Coating
(BS EN 15814), Flexible Sheet (BS EN 13967), Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric
Waterproofing Membrane (ASTM C836) or equivalent shall be tested as per this section.
62
Footnote 62: The sampling, preparation of samples shall be done in accordance with
ASTM D146, D228, D2829, D3183, D3617, D5147, D7636, BS EN 13416 or equivalent as
applicable.
QCS 2010
19.00 Waterproofing,
Roofing60, 61, 62
19.01 Drainage Fabric
(such as Geotextiles, Geomembranes,
Geosynthetics etc)
19.02 Average Thickness,
Thickness Tolerance,
Overall Thickness
(as applicable) Waterproofing
Membrane
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
QCS 2010
Method
ASTM C1306, D5385,
D7281, DIN 1048-5,
BS EN 1928, BS EN
13111, BS EN 15820,
BS EN 15817
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per project
site
Change in material
As per relevant
standards
BS EN 14694
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D1204, BS EN
As per the
1107-1, BS EN 1107-2,
Engineers request
BS EN 15818
ASTM D746, D2136,
As per the
D5636, BS EN 1109,
Engineers request
BS EN 15813
BS EN 15816
Page 77
Remarks
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
19.06 Resistance Under
Water Pressure,
Water Penetration,
Resistance,
Tightness (as
applicable) Waterproofing
Membrane
19.07 Water Absorption Waterproofing
Membrane
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
19.16 Adhesion to Rigid
Substrate, Self (or
Peel Strength) Waterproofing
Membrane
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM D412, D1000,
D429, D903, D4138,
D4541, D7234, BS EN
13596, BS EN ISO
4624
ASTM C1305
ASTM D4787
ASTM D5957
19.21 Resistance to
Ageing, Fatigue,
Accelerated
Weathering (UV
Radiation, Heating),
Extensibility,
Retention of
Properties Waterproofing
Membrane
19.22 Pliability Degrees Bitumen-Saturated
Felts and Woven
Fabrics for Roofing
and Waterproofing
19.23 Hardness (InitialShore, Rockwell,
International) Waterproofing
Membrane
19.24 Set to Touch, Drying
Time - Waterproofing
Membrane
19.25 Capability to Seal
Around Fasteners Waterproofing
Membrane
ASTM D146
As per the
Engineers request
QCS 2010
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D7349
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per project
site for preformed
membrane
3 test per 1000 m2
(for liquid applied on
site)
Change in material
1 test per project
site
Change in material
Page 78
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
19.26 Test Methods for
Emulsified Bitumens
Used as Protective
Coatings
19.27 Dimension of
Protection Board
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM D2939
BS 8102
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D36
ASTM D4
ASTM D4060
ASTM D4989
ASTM C308
ASTM C579
ASTM C580
ASTM C882
ASTM D1475
ASTM C531
QCS 2010
ASTM C307
ASTM C413
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Page 79
QCS 2010
19.42
19.43
19.44
19.46
19.47
19.48
19.49
19.50
19.51
19.52
19.53
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Vapour Transmission
- Volatile Liquid
Voids - Roofing and
Waterproofing
Membrane
Flexibility - Roofing
and Waterproofing
Materials and
Membranes
Non-volatile Content
- Cold Liquid Applied
Membrane
Characterizing
Thermoplastic
Fabrics - Roofing
and Waterproofing
Resistance to Wind
Load, UpliftMembrane Roofing
Systems
Impact Resistance Bituminous Roofing
Systems
Adhesive and
Cohesive Strength
Between Materials Roofing or
Waterproofing
Membranes and
Systems
Resistance to
Compaction of
Asphalt Layer Waterproofing
Membrane for Bridge
Behaviour of
Bitumen Sheets
During Application of
Mastic Asphalt Waterproofing
Membrane for Bridge
Compatibility by Heat
Conditioning Waterproofing
Membrane for Bridge
Peel, Shear
Resistance of Joints
- Waterproofing
Membrane
QCS 2010
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM D814
ASTM D5076
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D5683
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C1250
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D4830
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM E907, BS EN
16002
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D3746
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D7105
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 14692
BS EN 14693
BS EN 14691
BS EN 12316-1, BS
EN 12316-2, BS EN
12317-1, BS EN
12317-2
Page 80
Remarks
19.45
Section 1
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
20.00 Resin,
Polymer/Cement
Composition63, 64
20.01 Compressive
Strength
20.02
20.03
20.04
20.05
20.06
20.07
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
63
Footnote 63: Acrylic Polymer (for all applications), Elastomeric Joint Sealant (ASTM C920),
Acrylic Polymer (ASTM C881), Latex Agents for Bonding (ASTM C1059) or equivalent shall
be tested as per this section requirement.
64
QCS 2010
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Method3
19.54 Resistance to Ozone BS EN 1844
- Waterproofing
Membrane
19.55 Testing and Analysis ASTM D228
of Asphalt Roll
Roofing, Cap Sheets,
and Shingles Used in
Roofing and
Waterproofing
ASTM D6294
19.56 Corrosion
Resistance of
Ferrous Metal
Fastener Assemblies
Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing
Page 81
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
20.08 Temperature of
Deflection Under
Bending Stress
20.09 Creep in
Compression
Method
BS 6319-10
BS 6319-11
BS 6319-12
ASTM G154
ASTM C882, BS EN
12615
ASTM C482
ASTM E303
ASTM D4060
QCS 2010
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 2000 kg if
the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
1 test per 2000 kg if
the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
1 test per 2000 kg if
the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
1 test per 2000 kg if
the amount exceeds
2000 kg in total
1 test per 500 litres
if the amount
exceeds 500 litres
in total
1 test per 500 litres
if the amount
exceeds 500 litres
in total
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Page 82
Remarks
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Quality Assurance
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Method
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
BS EN 772-1
BS EN 772-4, BS EN
772-13
Page 83
BS EN 772-20
BS EN 772-11, BS EN
772-21
Each type
1 test per batch/lot
1 test per 5000
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
1 test per batch/lot
1 test per 5000
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
1 test per batch/lot
1 test per 5000
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
1 test per batch/lot
1 test per 5000
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
1 test per batch/lot
1 test per 5000
units
1 test per 1000 m2
1 test shall
comprise of 5
samples
1 test shall
comprise of 3
samples
65
Footnote 65: Masonry, Masonry Units, Precast Concrete Masonry Units, Movement Joint
Materials, Mortar, Screed, Plaster, Skim Coat, Grout for Masonry, Bonding Agent, Lime,
Gypsum, Polymer Modified Cement Mortar, Prepacked Floor Screed, Prepacked Waterproof
Screed, Self-Levelling Screed, Prepacked Plaster, Prepacked Skim Coat, Grouts for Masonry
(ASTM C476), Mortar for Masonry (ASTM C144, C270) and/or products or materials
conforming to BS 6073-2, BS EN 771-1, BS EN 771-2, BS EN 771-3, BS EN 771-4, BS EN
771-5, BS EN 771-6, BS EN 1338 or equivalent shall be tested as per this section
requirement.
66
Footnote 66: Each material shall be tested separately as per the specified testing
frequency as applicable.
67
Footnote 67: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM C50, C67, C1019, BS EN
13892-1 or equivalent as applicable.
QCS 2010
Part 8
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
21.06 Bending Tensile
Strength - Masonry
Units
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 772-6
BS 6073-2
ASTM D1751
ASTM C793, BS EN
ISO 11600
ASTM E514
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each type
1 test per batch/lot
1 test per 5000
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
1 test per batch/lot
1 test per 5000
units
1 test per 1000 m2
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Each mix
Change in mix
ASTM C413
DIN 1048-5
ASTM C348
Each mix
Change in mix
Each mix
Change in mix
Each mix
Change in mix
Each mix
Change in mix
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C1506, BS
4551
Each mix
Change in mix
BS EN 1015-9
BS EN 196-3
20.21 UV Accelerated
Weathering - Self
Levelling Screed
ASTM G154
Each mix
Change in mix
Each mix
Change in mix
Each mix
Change in mix
QCS 2010
Remarks
Page 84
QCS 2010
20.22
20.23
20.25
20.26
20.27
20.28
20.29
20.30
20.31
20.32
20.33
20.34
20.35
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Shear Adhesion
Bond - Self-Levelling
Screed
Slip Resistance
(Before and After
Accelerated
Weathering) - Self
Levelling Screed
Tensile Adhesion
Bond Strength - Self
Levelling Screed
Bond Strength of
Mortar to Masonry
Units
Tensile Pull Off
Strength (Before and
After Weathering)
Preconstruction &
Construction
Evaluation - Mortars
for Plain and
Reinforced Unit
Masonry
Abrasion Resistance
of Mortar Surfaces
Air Content Hydraulic Cement
Mortar
Length Change of
Hydraulic-Cement
Mortars Exposed to a
Sulfate Solution
Examination and
Analysis - Hardened
Mortar
Total Solids Content Bonding Agent
Physical Testing Lime
Physical Testing Gypsum
Block Type Insulation
QCS 2010
Quality Assurance
Page 85
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each mix
Change in mix
BS EN 13036-4
Each mix
Change in mix
ASTM D4541, BS EN
13892-8
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C952
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 1015-12
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C780
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C944
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Method
ASTM C482
ASTM C185
ASTM C1012
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM C1324
As per the
Engineers request
BS ISO 124
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Each Source
Change in material
ASTM C110
ASTM C472
ASTM C203
ASTM C265
Remarks
20.24
Section 1
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
20.37 Water Soluble
Chloride - Mortar,
Bedding Mortar
Quality Assurance
Page 86
Method
ASTM C1218
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each Source
Change in material
BS EN 1339, BS EN
1340
BS EN 1339, BS EN
1340
BS EN 1339, BS EN
1340
22.04 Compressive
Strength
BS EN 1339, BS EN
1340
BS EN 1339, BS EN
1340
22.06 Flatness
BS EN 1339, BS EN
1340
BS EN 1339, BS EN
1340
Remarks
Each Type
1 test per 1000
units
Each Type
1 test per 1000
units
Each Type
1 test per 1000
units
Each Type
1 test per 1000
units
Each Type
1 test per 1000
units
Each Type
1 test per 1000
units
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
ASTM D4632, D5034
ASTM D751, D3787,
D4833, D6241, BS EN
ISO 12236
ASTM D1004, D4533
68
Footnote 68: These tests shall be carried out for geo-textiles, geo-textile related products,
geo-membranes, geo-membrane related products, geosynthetics, geosynthetics clay liners
etc wherever its use may be such as in the tunnels, sea-sides, soil stabilisation,
embankment, roofs etc as applicable.
69
Footnote 69: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM D4354 or equivalent as
applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
23.04 Strength, Tensile
Strength
Quality Assurance
BS EN 13738
ASTM D6496
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D2216
23.13 Resistance to
Perforation
23.14 Pull-out Resistance
in Soil
23.15 Carbon Black
Content, Carbon
Black Dispersion Geomembrane,
Geosynthetics
23.16 Peel Strength Needle Punched
Geosynthetic
23.17 Moisture Content Geosynthetic Clay
Liners
QCS 2010
Remarks
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 2,000 m2
Change in material
Method
ASTM D4595, D4885,
D5035, D6693, BS EN
ISO 10319
ASTM D4595, D4632,
BS EN ISO 10319
Page 87
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Method3
23.18 Bentonite Free Swell, ASTM D5890
Swell Index Geosynthetic Clay
Liners
BS EN ISO 10416
23.19 Montmorillonite
Content Geosynthetic Clay
Liners
70
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 2,000 m2
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
Methods to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
BS EN 13823
BS 476
Methods to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
BS EN 573-3
QCS 2010
Remarks
24.00 Anti-Termite
Treatment
24.01 Sampling and
Testing Programme
to be proposed by
the Contractor for
Engineers approval
Page 88
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
26.02 Dimensions
26.03 Mechanical
Properties
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 485-1, BS EN
755-3, BS EN 755-6,
BS EN 755-4, BS EN
755-7, BS EN 755-8,
BS EN 755-9, BS EN
12020-2
BS EN 485-2, BS EN
755-2
ASTM B557
Methods to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Page 89
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 1000 m
1 test per type
Change in material
Remarks
Part 8
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Refer to
footnote
Methods to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Refer to
footnote
Methods to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor for
Engineers approval
71
Footnote 71: Products conforming to ASTM A36, A47, A53, A500 or equivalent as
applicable.
72
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
30.00 Tiles, Grouts and
Adhesive for Tiles
etc73, 74
30.01 Resistance to
Surface Abrasion Tiles
Page 90
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Method
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
BS EN ISO 10545-7
BS EN ISO 10545-6
BS EN ISO 10545-5
ASTM C485, BS EN
ISO 10545-2
ASTM C373, BS EN
ISO 10545-3
BS EN ISO 10545-4
73
74
QCS 2010
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
30.10 Linear Thermal
Expansion - Tiles
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN ISO 10545-8
30.13 Resistance to
Abrasion (or Wear
Test) - Grout for Tiles
30.14 Bend (or Flexural)
and Compressive
Strength - Grout for
Tiles
30.15 Shrinkage - Grout for
Tiles
30.16 Water Absorption Grout for Tiles
30.17 Slip, Adhesion Test Adhesives for Tiles
30.18 Tensile & Shear
Adhesion, Bond
Strength
Adhesives, Reaction
Resin Adhesives for
Tiles
30.19 Open Time Adhesives for Tiles
BS EN 12808-2, BS
ISO 13007-4
BS EN 12808-3, BS
ISO 13007-4
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 12808-5, BS
ISO 13007-4
BS ISO 13007-2
ASTM C482, BS EN
1324, BS EN 1348, BS
EN 12003
BS EN 12808-4, BS
ISO 13007-4
BS EN 1346
BS ISO 13007-2
BS EN 13748-1, BS
EN 13748-2
QCS 2010
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 3000
units
1 test per type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
1 test per type/mix
Change in material
1 test per type/mix
Change in material
BS ISO 13007-2
BS ISO 13007-2
BS ISO 13007-2
BS ISO 13007-2
BS EN 1347
Remarks
Page 91
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
30.25 Transverse
Deformation Cementitious
Adhesives and
Grouts
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 12002
BS EN 13964
BS EN 13964
BS EN 13964
BS EN 13964
BS EN 13964
BS EN 13964
BS EN 13964
BS EN 13964
31.10 Condensation
BS EN 13964
QCS 2010
Methods to be
proposed by the
Contractor and to be
approved by the
Engineer
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor and to
be approved by the
Engineer
Methods to be
proposed by the
Contractor and to be
approved by the
Engineer
Frequency to be
proposed by the
Contractor and to
be approved by the
Engineer
Remarks
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
As per the
Engineers request
Page 92
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
34.00 Paint, Varnish,
Pigments for
Colouring
34.01 Density of Paint
Quality Assurance
Page 93
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Method
ASTM D1210
Non destructive
ASTM D2486
34.04 Viscosity
ASTM D562
ASTM D4400
BS EN ISO 2813
BS 3900-D9 (ISO
7724-2)
Refer to
footnote
ASTM D3359, BS EN
ISO 2409 (BS 3900E6)
ASTM D4541, BS EN
ISO 4624
Refer to
footnote
34.10 pH
ASTM D3723
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
75
Footnote 75: It is sufficient for the Contractor to carry out either one of these Tests,
whichever is deemed suitable for the site in consultation with the Engineer.
76
Footnote 76: It is sufficient for the Contractor to carry out either one of these Tests,
whichever is deemed suitable for the site in consultation with the Engineer.
QCS 2010
ASTM D1475
Remarks
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
ASTM D522, BS EN
ISO 1519
ASTM D4060
ASTM D2370
ASTM D822, D4587
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per type
Change in material
Remarks
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Method3
34.14 Resistance to Liquids ASTM D5401, BS EN
ISO 2812-1, 2812-2,
2812-3, 2812-4, 28125
BS EN 12878
34.15 Pigments for the
Colouring of Building
Materials
34.16 Fire Resistance
Refer to fire testing
section
34.17 Volatile Content
ASTM D2369, BS EN
11890-1, BS EN
11890-2
34.18 Non-Volatile Content ASTM D5095
Page 94
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
AASHTO M249
77
Footnote 77: Road marking, Marking, Roads, Studs (road), Cats eyes, Construction
systems parts, Retroreflective materials, Reflective materials, Permanent, Temporary etc as
applicable.
78
Footnote 78: Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM D7307, D7308 or
equivalent as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
35.02 Thickness Thermoplastic
35.03 Skid Resistance Thermoplastic
35.04 Density Thermoplastic
35.05 Luminance Thermoplastic
Method
BS 3262-3
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per 500 m
BS EN 1436
AASHTO M249
AASHTO T250
AASHTO T250
AASHTO T250, BS EN
1423, BS EN 1424
ASTM D711
AASHTO T250, BS
3262-3
ASTM D3723
QCS 2010
Page 95
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
1 test per 1000 kg
Change in material
1 test per 1000 kg
Change in material
1 test per 1000 kg
Change in material
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
Remarks
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
35.21
35.22
35.23
35.25
35.26
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Luminous Intensity Retroreflecting Road
Studs
Colour, Colorimetry Retroreflecting Road
Studs
Chromaticity Retroreflecting Road
Studs
Resilience Retroreflecting Road
Studs
Fixing Retroreflecting Road
Studs
Optical Measurement
- Retroreflecting
Road Studs
36.03 Thermoplastic
Ancillary Fittings
79
Quality Assurance
Method
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
Page 96
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
1 test per project
site
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
BS EN 1463-1, BS EN
1463-2
Remarks
35.24
Section 1
Refer to
footnote
As per relevant
standards
As per relevant
standards
BS 4660, BS EN
13598-1
As per relevant
standards
ASTM D638, BS EN
Each type
Each batch of
delivery
Each diameter
Each type
Each batch of
delivery
Each diameter
Each type
Each batch of
delivery
Each diameter
As per Engineers
request
Each type
Each batch of
delivery
Each diameter
Footnote 79: Pipes, fittings, valves etc and/or products and materials conforming to BS
3505, BS EN ISO 1452-1, BS EN ISO 1452-2, BS EN ISO 1452-3, BS EN ISO 1452-4, BS
EN ISO 1452-5 or equivalent shall be tested as per this section requirement as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
36.06 Leaktightness
Method
BS EN ISO 13845 (BS
2782-11)
ASTM E1003
ASTM E1002
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each type
Each batch of
delivery
Each diameter
Each line
Remarks
Each line
Refer to
footnote
BS EN 639, BS EN
640, BS EN 641, BS
EN 642
BS EN 639, BS EN
640, BS EN 641, BS
EN 642
ASTM E1003, BS EN
639, BS EN 640, BS
EN 641
Page 97
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each line
ASTM E1002
ASTM C924
Each line
ASTM C1214
Each line
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
80
Footnote 80: It is sufficient for the Contractor to carry out either one of these Tests,
whichever is deemed suitable for the site in consultation with the Engineer.
81
82
Footnote 82: It is sufficient for the Contractor to carry out either one of these Tests,
whichever is deemed suitable for the site in consultation with the Engineer.
QCS 2010
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
37.07 Negative or Positive
Air Pressure Test82 Concrete Sanitary
Sewer Pipe
37.08 Compressive
Strength Test
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM C1618
BS EN 639, BS EN
640, BS EN 641
BS EN 641
BS EN 639, BS EN
640
ASTM C497, BS EN
639, BS EN 640
BS EN 639
BS EN 642
ASTM C497, BS EN
642
ASTM C497
QCS 2010
BS EN 642
ASTM A1032
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each line
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
As per Engineers
request
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Page 98
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Method3
38.00 Vitrified Clay Pipes,
Joints, Manholes
etc83, 84
38.01 Dimensions
BS EN 295-3
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
ASTM C1091
38.03 Straightness
BS EN 295-3
BS EN 295-3
BS EN 295-3
ASTM C828, BS EN
295-3
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
83
Footnote 83: Ceramics, Pipes, Pipe fittings, Drainpipes, Pipe couplings, Joints, Sewers etc
shall also be tested in accordance with this section requirement.
84
QCS 2010
Page 99
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
38.08 Strength (Crushing)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method
ASTM C301, BS EN
295-3
BS EN 295-3
Minimum
Frequency4, 5
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 295-3
ASTM C301
ASTM E1003
As per the
Engineers request
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each line
ASTM E1002
Each line
85
Remarks
BS EN 295-3
Page 100
Refer to
footnote
Refer to
footnote
Footnote 85: It is sufficient for the Contractor to carry out either one of these Tests,
whichever is deemed suitable for the site in consultation with the Engineer.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method3
39.04 Hardness
ASTM D2583, BS EN
14636-1, BS EN
14636-2
BS EN 14636-1, BS
EN 14636-2
As per relevant
standards
As per relevant
standards
ASTM D2584
As per relevant
standards
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
86
Footnote 86: Plastic Piping Systems for Non-Pressure Drainage and Sewer, Polyester
Resin Concrete (PRC), Pipes and Fittings with Flexible Joints, Plastic Pipelines, Pipe
Couplings, Drainpipes, Manholes and Inspection Chambers and/or products and materials
conforming to BS EN 1796, BS EN 14364 or equivalent shall be tested as per this section
requirement as applicable.
87
Footnote 87: Sample preparation shall be in accordance with ASTM D618 or equivalent as
applicable.
QCS 2010
Minimum Frequency4
Page 101
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
39.10 Hoop Tensile
Strength
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method3
ASTM D638, D2290,
BS EN 14636-1, BS
EN 14636-2
ASTM D2290, BS EN
14636-1, BS EN
14636-2
ASTM D570
ASTM D1599
ASTM D695
BS EN 545, BS EN
598, BS EN 1092-2,
BS ISO 2531
BS EN 545, BS EN
598, BS EN 1092-2
Remarks
Minimum Frequency4
1 test per 30 pipes
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
1 test per 30 pipes
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
1 test per 30 pipes
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
Page 102
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
88
89
Footnote 89: Sampling shall be done in accordance with BS 6001-1 (ISO 2859-1) or
equivalent as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
40.04 External Coating
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method3
BS EN 545, BS EN
598, BS EN 1092-2,
BS EN 15189
ASTM D1000, BS
2782-0, BS EN 15189
ASTM E213
ASTM E1003
BS EN 14901
ASTM D4541
ASTM B117
90
ASTM E1002
ISO 4633
Minimum Frequency4
Remarks
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Refer to
Each line
footnote
Refer to
Each line
footnote
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each Diameter
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Footnote 90: It is sufficient for the Contractor to carry out either one of these Tests,
whichever is deemed suitable for the site in consultation with the Engineer.
QCS 2010
Page 103
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
40.14 Pinhole Test, Spark
Holiday Test Internal, External
Lining
Method3
ASTM D5162, G6,
G62, BS 1344-11 (ISO
2746), BS EN ISO
8289
ASTM D714, D1654
ASTM D2794
ASTM D4060
ASTM D1653
ASTM G12, D6132,
D7091
Page 104
Minimum Frequency4
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
Each batch of
delivery
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Refer to
footnote
41.01 Performance
BS 8442, BS EN
12899-1
41.02 Luminance
BS 8442, BS EN
12899-1
41.03 Chromaticity,
Photometry (Light
Measurement)
41.04 Mechanical Testing,
Impact Testing, Wind
Loading,
Environmental
testing, Loading
41.05 Retroreflective
Materials
BS 8442
41.06 Coefficient of
Retroreflection,
Reflection Factor
41.07 Measurement of
Retroreflective Signs
ASTM E810, BS EN
12899-1
BS EN 12899-1
91
Remarks
Quality Assurance
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
BS 8442, BS EN
12899-1
Each type
Change in material
BS EN 12899-1
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Footnote 91: Road signs, Street furniture, Bollards (traffic), Signs, Warning devices,
Portable, Fixed, Vertical Road Traffic Signs, Pedestrian-crossing lights, Flashing lights, Studs
(road), Reflective materials, Lighting (road signs), Schools, Barriers etc and/or materials
conforming to (ASTM A123) as applicable.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
41.09 Lighting (Road
Signs)
41.10 Galvanise Coating
41.11 Dimensions
42.05 Changes in
Appearance, Light
Stability
Quality Assurance
Method3
BS EN 12899-1
ASTM A90, B487,
E376, BS EN ISO
1461
As per relevant
standards
As per relevant
standards
Page 105
Minimum Frequency4
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Remarks
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Refer to
footnote
BS EN 1963, BS EN
13329, BS EN 13696
Each type
Change in material
BS EN 1533
Each type
Change in material
BS EN 1534, BS EN
13329, BS ISO 24335,
BS ISO 24343-1
ASTM F1514, BS
4682-2, BS 4682-3, BS
4682-4, BS 4805, BS
5921, BS EN 426, BS
EN 427, BS EN 662,
BS EN 669, BS EN
986, BS EN 994, BS
EN 1841, BS EN 1910,
BS EN 13329, BS EN
13647, BS ISO 17984,
BS ISO 23999, BS ISO
24341
ASTM F1515, BS EN
1471
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
92
Footnote 92: Floor coverings, Laminates, Sheet flooring, Panel flooring and/or materials
and products conforming to BS 4050-2, BS 4592-0, BS EN 685, BS EN 1307, BS EN 1470,
BS EN 13297, BS EN 13329, BS EN 13848, BS EN 14259, BS EN 14293, BS EN 14342, BS
EN 14565, BS EN 14978, BS EN 15468, BS ISO 10874 or equivalent shall also be tested as
per this section as applicable.
93
Footnote 93: Sampling of material and products shall be in accordance with BS EN 14259,
BS EN 14762 or equivalent as applicable.
QCS 2010
Part 8
QCS 2010
42.06
42.07
42.09
42.10
42.11
42.12
42.13
42.14
42.15
42.16
42.17
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Resistance to
Chemical Agents,
Delamination,
Cigarettes
Performance,
Adhesion,
Mechanical, Ageing
etc - Adhesives for
Floor Covering
Electrical Resistance
to Earth
Mass, Mass Per Unit
Area, Density
Quality Assurance
Method3
ASTM F925, BS EN
1399, BS EN 13442,
BS EN ISO 11857
Minimum Frequency4
Each type
Change in material
BS EN 14259, BS EN
14293
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Each type
Change in material
BS EN 718, BS EN
984, BS EN 672, BS
ISO 8543
ASTM F386, BS 5041
Overall Thickness,
Pile Thickness Above (ISO 1765), BS 4098,
BS 4939 (ISO 3416),
the Backing,
Substrate, Thickness BS EN 428, BS ISO
1766, BS ISO 10834,
Swelling
BS ISO 24336
BS ISO 24334
Lock Strength Laminate Floor
Coverings
BS EN 14978
Scratch Tests,
Surface Defects,
Humidity - Acrylic
Based Surface Layer
BS EN 985
Caster Chair Test Textile Floor
Coverings
BS EN 664, BS ISO
Volatile Organic
10580
Compound (VOC)
Emissions, Volatile
Loss
BS EN 670, BS ISO
Identification of
26985
Linoleum and
Determination of
Cement Content and
Ash Residue Resilient Floor
Coverings
Flexibility - Resilient ASTM F137
Flooring Materials
BS EN 684
Seam Strength Resilient Floor
Coverings
QCS 2010
Page 106
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
Remarks
42.08
Section 1
QCS 2010
42.18
42.19
42.20
Part 8
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
Reaction to Fire
Tests, Effects of a
Small Source of
Ignition
Gelling - Resilient
Floor Coverings
Conventional Pattern
Depths - Resilient
Floor Coverings
Spreading of Water,
Moisture Content
Quality Assurance
Method3
BS 4790, BS EN ISO
9239-1
Minimum Frequency4
Each type
Change in material
BS EN 666
As per the
Engineers request
As per the
Engineers request
BS EN 663
BS EN 661, BS EN
12105
42.22 Exudation of
Plasticizers Resilient Floor
Coverings
42.23 Kerosine Number Roofing and Flooring
Felt
42.24 Staining of Vinyl
Flooring by
Adhesives
42.25 Static Coefficient of
Friction
BS EN 665
ASTM D2394
QCS 2010
Page 107
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D727
As per the
Engineers request
ASTM D5215
ASTM D2047
Each type
Change in material
As per the
Engineers request
Each type
Change in material
BS ISO 25620
Each type
Change in material
Remarks
42.21
Section 1
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Method3
ASTM D116
Each type
Change in material
ASTM F417
Each type
Change in material
Remarks
Refer to
footnote
BS EN 1253-2
BS EN 1253-2
BS EN 1253-2
BS EN 1253-2
BS EN 1253-2
44.06 Thermal-cycling
Tests - Gullies
BS EN 1253-2
BS EN 1253-2
BS EN 1253-2
BS EN 124, BS EN
44.09 Deflection Tests,
Strength of Materials 1253-2
- Gullies, Manhole
Covers
44.10 Load Test - Manhole BS EN 124
Covers
94
Minimum Frequency4
Page 108
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Each type
Change in material
Footnote 94: Gullies, Gullies with light liquids closure, Manholes, Access covers, Wastewater drainage, Drainage, Surface-water drainage, Water supply, Waste systems, Rainwater
control systems etc shall be tested as per this section requirement as applicable and/or
Products and Materials conforming to BS EN 124, BS EN 1253-1, Spheroidal graphite cast
irons (ISO 1083), Gray cast iron (ISO 185) or equivalent shall also be tested in accordance
with this section requirement as applicable.
QCS 2010
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
43.00 Ceramic for
Electrical
Appliances
43.01 Vitrified Ceramic
Materials for
Electrical Appliances
43.02 Flexural Strength Electronic Grade 3
Ceramic
Quality Assurance
QCS 2010
Section 1
Material /Section /
Activity1, 2 & the
Required Tests
44.11 Type Testing Manhole Covers
44.12 Epoxy Coating95 Manhole Covers
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Method3
BS EN 124
ASTM D1005, D6132,
D7091, BS EN 124
Page 109
Minimum Frequency4
Remarks
Each type
Change in material
Refer to
Each type
Change in material footnote
95
Footnote 95: The minimum thickness of the Epoxy Coating shall be 50 microns unless
otherwise specified.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 110
REFERENCES
The following standards are applicable to this section:
a. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) :
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
AASHTO M182 - Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute
or Kenaf and Cotton Mats
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
AASHTO R39 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Laboratory
19)
QCS 2010
Type)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 111
21)
AASHTO T11 - Standard Method of Test for Materials Finer Than 75-m
(No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
22)
23)
25)
AASHTO T24 - Standard Method of Test for Obtaining and Testing Drilled
Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete
26)
27)
AASHTO T27 - Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and
Coarse Aggregates.
28)
29)
30)
31)
32)
AASHTO T48 - Standard Method of Test for Flash and Fire Points by
Cleveland Open Cup.
33)
34)
35)
36)
37)
38)
39)
QCS 2010
24)
QCS 2010
Section 1
40)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 112
41)
42)
AASHTO T88 - Standard Method of Test for Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
43)
AASHTO T89 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Liquid Limit
of Soils.
44)
AASHTO T90 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Plastic Limit
45)
46)
47)
48)
49)
50)
51)
52)
53)
54)
55)
AASHTO T112 - Standard Method of Test for Clay Lumps and Friable
Particles in Aggregate
56)
57)
58)
AASHTO T121 - Standard Method of Test for Density (Unit Weight), Yield,
and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
59)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 113
60)
61)
62)
63)
AASHTO T152 - Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
64)
65)
66)
67)
68)
69)
70)
71)
AASHTO T179 - Standard Method of Test for Effect of Heat and Air on
Asphalt Materials (Thin-Film Oven Test)
72)
73)
74)
AASHTO T193 - Standard Method of Test for the California Bearing Ratio.
75)
76)
AASHTO T196 - Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Volumetric Method
77)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
78)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 114
79)
80)
AASHTO T206 - Standard Method of Test for Penetration Test and SplitBarrel Sampling of Soils
81)
83)
84)
AASHTO T219 - Standard Method of Test for Testing Lime for Chemical
Constituents and Particle Sizes
85)
86)
AASHTO T223 - Standard Method of Test for Field Vane Shear Test in
Cohesive Soil.
87)
88)
AASHTO T228 - Standard Method of Test for Specific Gravity of SemiSolid Asphalt Materials
89)
AASHTO T236 - Standard Method of Test for Direct Shear Test of Soils
under Consolidated Drained Conditions
90)
AASHTO T238 - Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil and SoilAggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
91)
AASHTO T239 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
92)
AASHTO T240 - Standard Method of Test for Effect of Heat and Air on a
Moving Film of Asphalt (Rolling Thin-Film Oven Test)
93)
94)
95)
96)
QCS 2010
82)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 115
98)
99)
100)
102)
103)
104)
105)
106)
107)
108)
AASHTO T299 - Standard Method of Test for Rapid Identification of AlkaliSilica Reaction Products in Concrete
109)
110)
111)
112)
113)
114)
QCS 2010
101)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 116
116)
117)
119)
2)
3)
ISO 4633 - Rubber seals - Joint rings for water supply, drainage and
sewerage pipelines- Specification for materials
4)
AI MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot Mix
Types.
f.
QCS 2010
118)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 117
1)
2)
3)
ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and HotDipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
4)
ASTM A90 - Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron
and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings
5)
7)
8)
ASTM A416 - Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated SevenWire for Prestressed Concrete
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
ASTM A931 - Standard Test Method for Tension Testing of Wire Ropes
and Strand
16)
17)
ASTM A981 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Bond Strength for
0.600-in. [15.24-mm] Diameter Steel Prestressing Strand, Grade 270
[1860], Uncoated, Used in Prestressed Ground Anchors
18)
19)
ASTM A1034 - Standard Test Methods for Testing Mechanical Splices for
Steel Reinforcing Bars
QCS 2010
6)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 118
20)
ASTM A1061 - Standard Test Methods for Testing Multi-Wire Steel Strand
21)
ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
22)
ASTM B487 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Metal and Oxide
Coating Thickness by Microscopical Examination of Cross Section
23)
ASTM B557 - Standard Test Methods for Tension Testing Wrought and
Cast Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products
24)
26)
ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field.
27)
28)
29)
30)
ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores
and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
31)
32)
33)
ASTM C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and
Structural Clay Tile
34)
ASTM C70 - Standard Test Method for Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate
35)
ASTM C87 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine
Aggregate on Strength of Mortar
36)
37)
38)
39)
ASTM C97 - Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific
Gravity of Dimension Stone
40)
41)
QCS 2010
25)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 119
43)
44)
45)
ASTM C117 - Standard Test Method for Material Finer Than 75 m (No.
46)
47)
48)
49)
ASTM C127 - Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific
Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
50)
ASTM C128 - Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific
Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
51)
52)
ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and
Coarse Aggregates.
53)
ASTM C138 - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and
Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
54)
55)
ASTM C142 - Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles
in Aggregates.
56)
57)
58)
59)
60)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
61)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 120
ASTM C157 - Test Method for Length Change of Hardened HydraulicCement Mortar and Concrete
62)
63)
64)
65)
ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
66)
ASTM C183 - Standard Practice for Sampling and the Amount of Testing
of Hydraulic Cement
67)
ASTM C185 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Hydraulic Cement
Mortar
68)
69)
70)
71)
ASTM C192 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Laboratory
72)
ASTM C203 - Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural
Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation
73)
74)
75)
76)
ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Pressure Method
77)
78)
79)
80)
81)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 121
82)
83)
84)
85)
86)
ASTM C307 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of ChemicalResistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings
ASTM C308 - Standard Test Methods for Working, Initial Setting, and
Service Strength Setting Times of Chemical-Resistant Resin Mortars
88)
89)
ASTM C311 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or
Natural Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland-Cement
Concrete.
90)
91)
ASTM C348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of HydraulicCement Mortars
92)
93)
ASTM C373 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption, Bulk Density,
Apparent Porosity, and Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware
Products
94)
95)
96)
97)
98)
99)
100)
QCS 2010
87)
QCS 2010
Section 1
101)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 122
ASTM C469 - Standard Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and
Poisson's Ratio of Concrete in Compression
102)
103)
104)
105)
ASTM C482 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to
Portland Cement Paste
ASTM C485 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Warpage of Ceramic
Tile
107)
108)
109)
ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient
of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic
Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes
110)
111)
112)
113)
ASTM C580 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of
Elasticity of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings,
and Polymer Concretes
114)
115)
ASTM C597 - Standard Test Method for Pulse Velocity Through Concrete
116)
ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or
Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
117)
118)
ASTM C642 - Standard Test Method for Specific Gravity, Absorption, and
Voids in Hardened Concrete.
QCS 2010
106)
QCS 2010
Section 1
119)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 123
120)
121)
122)
124)
125)
126)
ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of
Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures.
127)
ASTM C828 - Standard Test Method for Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified
Clay Pipe Lines
128)
ASTM C836 - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold LiquidApplied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate
Wearing Course
129)
130)
131)
132)
133)
134)
135)
136)
ASTM C924 - Standard Practice for Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by
Low-Pressure Air Test Method
137)
QCS 2010
123)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 124
Paving Units
138)
ASTM C939 - Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for PreplacedAggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method)
139)
140)
141)
142)
143)
ASTM C953 - Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Grouts for
Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory.
144)
ASTM C989 - Standard Specification for Ground Granulated BlastFurnace Slag for use in Concrete and Mortars.
145)
146)
147)
ASTM C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout
148)
149)
ASTM C1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh
To Hardened Concrete
150)
151)
152)
153)
154)
155)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
156)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 125
157)
158)
159)
160)
161)
162)
163)
164)
165)
ASTM C1305 - Standard Test Method for Crack Bridging Ability of LiquidApplied Waterproofing Membrane
166)
167)
168)
169)
170)
171)
172)
QCS 2010
and Concrete.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 126
173)
ASTM C1437 Standard Test Method for Flow of Hydraulic Cement Mortar
174)
175)
ASTM C1522 - Standard Test Method for Extensibility After Heat Aging of
Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membranes
176)
177)
ASTM C1567 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali-
179)
180)
ASTM C1611 - Standard Test Method for Slump Flow of SelfConsolidating Concrete
181)
ASTM C1618 - Standard Test Method for Concrete Sanitary Sewer Pipe
by Negative (Vacuum) or Positive Air Pressure
182)
183)
184)
185)
ASTM D6 - Standard Test Method for Loss on Heating of Oil and Asphaltic
Compounds
186)
ASTM D36 - Standard Test Method for Softening Point of Bitumen (Ringand-Ball Apparatus)
187)
188)
189)
190)
191)
ASTM D92 - Standard Test Method for Flash and Fire points by Cleveland
Open Cup.
192)
ASTM D93 - Test Methods for Flash Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Cup
Tester
193)
QCS 2010
ASTM D95 - Standard Test Method for Water in Petroleum Products and
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 127
195)
196)
ASTM D146 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing BitumenSaturated Felts and Woven Fabrics for Roofing and Waterproofing
197)
ASTM D228 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling, Testing, and Analysis
of Asphalt Roll Roofing, Cap Sheets, and Shingles Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing
ASTM D242 - Standard Specification for Mineral Filler For Bituminous
Paving Mixtures
199)
200)
201)
202)
203)
204)
205)
ASTM D420 - Standard Practice for Investigating and Sampling Soil and
Rock for Engineering Purposes.
206)
ASTM D421 - Standard Practice for Dry Preparation of Soil Samples for
Particle-Size Analysis and Determination of Soil Constants.
207)
208)
209)
210)
211)
212)
ASTM D546 - Standard Test method for Sieve Analysis of Mineral Filler for
Road and Paving Materials.
213)
QCS 2010
ASTM D522 - Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached
198)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 128
Organic Coatings
214)
215)
216)
217)
219)
220)
221)
222)
223)
ASTM D711 - Standard Test Method for No-Pick-Up Time of Traffic Paint
224)
225)
ASTM D727 - Standard Test Method for Kerosine Number of Roofing and
Flooring Felt by the Vacuum Method
226)
227)
228)
229)
ASTM D792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity
(Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement
230)
231)
232)
233)
ASTM D854 - Standard Test Methods for Specific Gravity of Soil Solids by
Water Pycnometer
234)
QCS 2010
218)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 129
Paint
235)
ASTM D882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic
Sheeting
236)
237)
238)
239)
240)
241)
ASTM D1000 - Standard Test Methods for Pressure-Sensitive AdhesiveCoated Tapes Used for Electrical and Electronic Applications
242)
ASTM D1004 - Standard Test Method for Tear Resistance (Graves Tear)
of Plastic Film and Sheeting
243)
244)
245)
246)
ASTM D1143 - Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations Under Static
Axial Compressive Load
247)
ASTM D1188 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and
Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Coated Samples
248)
ASTM D1196 - Standard Test Method for Non-repetitive Static Plate Load
Tests of Soils and Flexible Pavement Components, for Use in Evaluation
and Design of Airport and Highway Pavements
249)
250)
251)
252)
253)
ASTM D1214 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Glass Spheres
254)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 130
256)
257)
258)
259)
ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil
in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
260)
261)
ASTM D1586 - Standard Test Method for Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
and Split-Barrel
262)
263)
264)
265)
266)
267)
268)
269)
270)
271)
ASTM D1754 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Heat and Air on
Asphaltic Materials (Thin-Film Oven Test).
272)
QCS 2010
Density-Gradient Technique
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 131
(T-Peel Test)
273)
ASTM D1883 - Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio)
of Laboratory-Compacted Soils
274)
275)
276)
277)
278)
279)
280)
281)
282)
ASTM D2136 - Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics-LowTemperature Bend Test
283)
284)
285)
286)
287)
ASTM D2196 - Standard Test Methods for Rheological Properties of NonNewtonian Materials by Rotational (Brookfield type) Viscometer
288)
289)
290)
ASTM D2290 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength
of Plastic or Reinforced Plastic Pipe by Split Disk Method
QCS 2010
Curing Type).
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 132
291)
292)
293)
294)
295)
296)
ASTM D2419 - Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils
297)
298)
299)
300)
301)
302)
ASTM D2563 - Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in GlassReinforced Plastic Laminate Parts
303)
304)
305)
306)
ASTM D2726 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and
Density of Non-Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
307)
308)
309)
ASTM D2872 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Heat and Air on a
Moving Film of Asphalt (Rolling Thin-Film Oven Test)
310)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
311)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 133
312)
313)
ASTM D2974 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture, Ash, and Organic
Matter of Peat and Other Organic Soils.
314)
316)
ASTM D3080 - Standard Test Method for Direct Shear Test of Soils Under
Consolidated Drained Conditions
317)
ASTM D3203 -Standard Test Method for Per Cent Air Voids in Compacted
Dense and Open Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
318)
ASTM D3205 - Test Method for Viscosity of Asphalt with Cone and Plate
Viscometer
319)
ASTM D3143 - Standard Test Method for Flash Point of Cutback Asphalt
with Tag Open-Cup Apparatus.
320)
321)
322)
323)
324)
325)
326)
327)
328)
QCS 2010
315)
QCS 2010
Section 1
329)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 134
330)
331)
332)
ASTM D3689 - Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations Under Static
Axial Tensile Load
ASTM D3723 - Standard Test Method for Pigment Content of WaterEmulsion Paints by Low-Temperature Ashing
334)
335)
336)
ASTM D3787 - Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of TextilesConstant-Rate-of-Traverse (CRT) Ball Burst Test
337)
338)
339)
340)
341)
342)
343)
ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and
Plasticity Index of Soils.
344)
345)
346)
347)
QCS 2010
333)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 135
Bentonitic Slurries
348)
ASTM D4400 - Standard Test Method for Sag Resistance of Paints Using
a Multinotch Applicator
349)
350)
351)
ASTM D4429 - Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio)
of Soils in Place
ASTM D4437 - Standard Practice for Non-destructive Testing (NDT) for
Determining the Integrity of Seams Used in Joining Flexible Polymeric
Sheet Geomembranes
353)
354)
355)
356)
357)
358)
359)
360)
ASTM D4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and
Elongation of Geotextiles
361)
362)
ASTM D4694 - Standard Test Method for Deflections with a FallingWeight-Type Impulse Load Device
363)
364)
ASTM D4718 - Standard Practice for Correction of Unit Weight and Water
Content for Soils Containing Oversize Particles
365)
QCS 2010
352)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 136
367)
368)
369)
370)
371)
372)
373)
374)
375)
376)
ASTM D4932 - Standard Test Method for Fastener Rupture and Tear
Resistance of Roofing and Waterproofing Sheets, Roll Roofing, and
Shingles
377)
378)
379)
380)
381)
ASTM D5035 - Standard Test Method for Breaking Force and Elongation
of Textile Fabrics (Strip Method)
382)
ASTM D5076 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Voids in Roofing and
Waterproofing Membranes
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
383)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 137
384)
385)
ASTM D5147 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Modified
Bituminous Sheet Material
ASTM D5162 - Standard Practice for Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of
Nonconductive Protective Coating on Metallic Substrates
387)
388)
389)
ASTM D5261 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass per Unit Area of
Geotextiles.
390)
ASTM D5329 - Standard Test Methods for Sealants and Fillers, HotApplied, for Joints and Cracks in Asphaltic and Portland Cement Concrete
Pavements
391)
392)
393)
394)
395)
396)
397)
398)
399)
QCS 2010
386)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 138
Vacuum Chamber
400)
401)
ASTM D5731 - Standard Test Method for Determination of the Point Load
Strength Index of Rock and Application to Rock Strength Classifications
402)
ASTM D5778 - Standard Test Method for Electronic Friction Cone and
Piezocone Penetration Testing of Soils
403)
404)
405)
406)
407)
ASTM D5882 - Standard Test Method for Low Strain Impact Integrity
Testing of Deep Foundations.
408)
ASTM D5890 - Standard Test Method for Swell Index of Clay Mineral
Component of Geosynthetic Clay Liners
409)
410)
ASTM D5993 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass Per Unit of
Geosynthetic Clay Liners
411)
412)
413)
414)
415)
416)
ASTM D6241 - Test Method for the Static Puncture Strength of Geotextiles
and Geotextile-Related Products Using a 50-mm Probe
417)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 139
419)
420)
422)
423)
424)
425)
426)
427)
428)
429)
ASTM D6927 - Standard Test Method for Marshall Stability and Flow of
Bituminous Mixtures
430)
431)
ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water
Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
432)
433)
QCS 2010
421)
QCS 2010
Section 1
434)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 140
435)
ASTM D7105 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Adhesive and
Cohesive Strength Between Materials in Roofing or Waterproofing
Membranes and Systems
436)
438)
439)
440)
441)
442)
ASTM D7383 - Standard Test Methods for Axial Compressive Force Pulse
(Rapid) Testing of Deep Foundations
443)
444)
445)
446)
447)
448)
449)
450)
451)
452)
ASTM E23 - Standard Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of
Metallic Materials
QCS 2010
437)
QCS 2010
Section 1
453)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 141
ASTM E30 - Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Steel, Cast Iron,
Open-Hearth Iron, and Wrought Iron
454)
455)
456)
458)
459)
ASTM E190 - Test Method for Guided Bend Test for Ductility of Welds
460)
ASTM E213 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Testing of Metal Pipe and
Tubing
461)
ASTM E290 - Test Methods for Bend Testing of Material for Ductility
462)
463)
ASTM E328 - Standard Test Method for Relaxation Tests for Materials and
Structures.
464)
465)
ASTM E351 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Cast IronAll Types
466)
467)
ASTM E514 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage
Through Masonry
468)
469)
470)
471)
ASTM E907 - Standard Test Method for Field Testing Uplift Resistance of
Adhered Membrane Roofing Systems
QCS 2010
457)
QCS 2010
Section 1
472)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 142
ASTM E950 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Longitudinal Profile
of Travelled Surfaces with an Accelerometer Established Inertial Profiling
Reference
473)
474)
475)
476)
477)
478)
479)
480)
ASTM E2340 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Skid Resistance
of Pavements and Other Trafficked Surfaces Using a Continuous
Reading, Fixed-Slip Technique
481)
482)
483)
484)
485)
486)
487)
488)
489)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
490)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 143
491)
492)
493)
494)
495)
496)
2)
BS 65 - Specification for vitrified clay pipes, fittings and ducts, also flexible
mechanical joints for use solely with surface water pipes and fittings
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
8)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 144
9)
10)
11)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
BS 1377-7 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes. Shear
strength tests (total stress)
23)
BS 1377-9 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes. In-situ
tests
24)
25)
26)
QCS 2010
12)
QCS 2010
Section 1
27)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 145
28)
29)
30)
32)
33)
34)
35)
36)
37)
38)
39)
40)
41)
42)
43)
44)
45)
46)
QCS 2010
31)
QCS 2010
Section 1
47)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 146
48)
49)
50)
51)
52)
53)
54)
55)
56)
57)
58)
59)
60)
BS 5385-3 - Wall and floor tiling. Design and installation of internal and
external ceramic floor tiles and mosaics in normal conditions. Code of
practice
61)
BS 5385-4 - Wall and floor tiling. Design and installation of ceramic and
mosaic tiling in special conditions. Code of practice
62)
BS 5385-5 - Wall and floor tiling. Design and installation of terazzo, natural
stone and agglomerated stone tile and slab flooring. Code of practice
63)
BS 5896 - Specification for high tensile steel wire and strand for the
prestressing of concrete
64)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 147
66)
68)
69)
70)
71)
72)
73)
74)
75)
76)
77)
78)
79)
QCS 2010
67)
QCS 2010
Section 1
80)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 148
81)
82)
83)
84)
85)
86)
87)
88)
89)
90)
91)
92)
93)
94)
95)
QCS 2010
tension
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 149
97)
98)
BS EN 124 - Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian
areas. Design requirements, type testing, marking, quality control
BS EN 196-1 - Methods of testing cement. Determination of strength
100)
101)
102)
103)
104)
105)
106)
107)
BS EN 295-1 - Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and
sewers. Requirements
108)
BS EN 295-2 - Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and
sewers. Quality control and sampling
109)
BS EN 295-3 - Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and
sewers. Test methods
110)
BS EN 295-4 - Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and
sewers. Requirements for special fittings, adaptors and compatible
accessories
111)
BS EN 295-5 - Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and
sewers. Requirements for perforated vitrified clay pipes and fittings
112)
BS EN 295-6 - Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and
sewers. Requirements for vitrified clay manholes
113)
BS EN 295-7 - Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and
sewers. Requirements for vitrified clay pipes and joints for pipe jacking
114)
BS EN 295-10 - Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains
and sewers. Performance requirements
QCS 2010
99)
QCS 2010
Section 1
115)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 150
116)
117)
118)
120)
121)
122)
123)
124)
125)
126)
127)
128)
129)
130)
131)
132)
133)
134)
135)
QCS 2010
119)
QCS 2010
Section 1
136)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 151
137)
138)
139)
140)
141)
142)
143)
144)
145)
BS EN 545 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for
water pipelines. Requirements and test methods
146)
147)
148)
BS EN 598 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for
sewerage applications. Requirements and test methods
149)
150)
151)
152)
BS EN 642 - Prestressed concrete pressure pipes, cylinder and noncylinder, including joints, fittings and specific requirement for prestressing
steel for pipes
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
153)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 152
154)
155)
156)
157)
158)
159)
160)
161)
162)
163)
164)
165)
166)
167)
168)
169)
170)
171)
172)
173)
QCS 2010
plasticizers
QCS 2010
Section 1
174)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 153
175)
176)
177)
179)
180)
181)
182)
183)
184)
185)
186)
187)
188)
189)
190)
QCS 2010
178)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 154
192)
193)
194)
195)
196)
197)
198)
199)
200)
201)
BS EN 969 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for gas
pipelines. Requirements and test methods
202)
203)
204)
205)
206)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
207)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 155
208)
209)
210)
211)
212)
213)
214)
215)
216)
217)
BS EN 1092-2 - Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves,
fittings and accessories, PN designated. Cast iron flanges
218)
219)
220)
221)
222)
223)
224)
QCS 2010
substrates
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 156
226)
227)
228)
229)
to elevated temperature
230)
231)
232)
233)
234)
235)
236)
237)
238)
239)
240)
241)
242)
243)
244)
245)
QCS 2010
rubber sheets for roofing. Method of artificial ageing by long term exposure
QCS 2010
Section 1
246)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 157
247)
248)
249)
251)
252)
253)
254)
255)
256)
257)
258)
259)
260)
261)
262)
263)
QCS 2010
250)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 158
including water
264)
265)
266)
267)
268)
269)
270)
271)
272)
273)
274)
275)
276)
277)
278)
279)
280)
281)
QCS 2010
reinforced
QCS 2010
Section 1
282)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 159
283)
284)
285)
286)
287)
288)
289)
290)
291)
292)
293)
294)
295)
296)
297)
298)
299)
300)
301)
302)
QCS 2010
of synthetic surfaces
QCS 2010
Section 1
303)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 160
304)
305)
306)
308)
309)
310)
311)
312)
313)
314)
315)
316)
317)
318)
319)
320)
QCS 2010
307)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 161
322)
323)
325)
326)
327)
328)
329)
330)
331)
332)
333)
334)
335)
336)
337)
338)
QCS 2010
324)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 162
Stiffness
339)
340)
341)
343)
344)
345)
346)
347)
348)
349)
350)
351)
352)
353)
354)
355)
356)
357)
QCS 2010
342)
QCS 2010
Section 1
358)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 163
359)
360)
361)
applications
362)
363)
364)
365)
366)
367)
368)
369)
370)
371)
372)
373)
QCS 2010
bituminous mixtures and surface treatments and for unbound and bound
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 164
375)
376)
377)
378)
379)
380)
381)
382)
383)
384)
385)
386)
387)
388)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 165
389)
390)
391)
392)
393)
394)
395)
396)
397)
398)
399)
400)
401)
402)
403)
404)
405)
406)
407)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 166
409)
410)
411)
412)
413)
414)
415)
416)
417)
418)
419)
420)
421)
422)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 167
424)
425)
426)
427)
428)
429)
430)
431)
432)
433)
434)
435)
436)
QCS 2010
conformity
QCS 2010
Section 1
437)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 168
438)
439)
440)
441)
442)
BS EN 15330-1 - Surfaces for sports areas. Synthetic turf and needlepunched surfaces primarily designed for outdoor use. Specification for
synthetic turf
443)
BS EN 15330-2 - Surfaces for sports areas. Synthetic turf and needlepunched surfaces primarily designed for outdoor use. Specification for
needle-punched surfaces
444)
445)
446)
447)
448)
449)
450)
451)
452)
QCS 2010
resistance
QCS 2010
Section 1
453)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 169
454)
455)
456)
458)
459)
BS EN ISO 1452-1 - Plastics piping systems for water supply and for
buried and above-ground drainage and sewerage under pressure.
Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC U). General
460)
BS EN ISO 1452-2 - Plastics piping systems for water supply and for
buried and above-ground drainage and sewerage under pressure.
Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC U). Pipes
461)
BS EN ISO 1452-3 - Plastics piping systems for water supply and for
buried and above-ground drainage and sewerage under pressure.
Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC U). Fittings
462)
BS EN ISO 1452-4 - Plastics piping systems for water supply and for
buried and above-ground drainage and sewerage under pressure.
Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC U). Valves
463)
BS EN ISO 1452-5 - Plastics piping systems for water supply and for
buried and above-ground drainage and sewerage under pressure.
Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC U). Fitness for purpose of the
system
464)
BS EN ISO 1461 - Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel
articles. Specifications and test methods
465)
466)
467)
468)
BS EN ISO 2719, BS 2000-34 - Determination of flash point. PenskyMartens closed cup method
469)
QCS 2010
457)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 170
471)
472)
473)
474)
475)
476)
477)
478)
479)
480)
481)
482)
483)
484)
485)
486)
487)
488)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 171
490)
491)
493)
494)
BS EN ISO 10321 - Geosynthetics. Tensile test for joints/seams by widewidth strip method
495)
496)
497)
498)
499)
500)
501)
502)
503)
504)
505)
506)
507)
508)
QCS 2010
492)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 172
510)
511)
513)
514)
515)
516)
517)
518)
519)
520)
521)
BS EN ISO 13845, BS 2782-11 - Plastics piping systems. Elastomericsealing-ring-type socket joints for use with unplasticized poly(vinyl
chloride) (PVC-U) pipes. Test method for leaktightness under internal
pressure and with angular deflection
522)
523)
524)
QCS 2010
ultrasonic testing of the weld seam of welded steel tubes for the detection
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 173
526)
527)
529)
530)
531)
532)
533)
534)
535)
536)
537)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 174
539)
540)
541)
542)
543)
544)
545)
546)
547)
548)
549)
550)
551)
552)
553)
554)
555)
QCS 2010
testing
QCS 2010
Section 1
556)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 175
BS ISO 2531 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for
water applications
557)
558)
559)
560)
561)
562)
563)
564)
565)
BS ISO 13007-2 - Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives. Test methods for
adhesives
566)
567)
BS ISO 13007-4 - Ceramic tiles. Grouts and adhesives. Test methods for
grouts
568)
569)
570)
571)
572)
573)
574)
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
575)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 176
576)
i.
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
28)
29)
30)
31)
QCS 2010
1)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 177
33)
34)
35)
36)
37)
38)
39)
40)
41)
42)
43)
44)
45)
46)
j.
47)
48)
49)
2)
3)
l.
2)
3)
QCS 2010
32)
QCS 2010
Section 1
1)
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 178
SN 640550 Essais sur les sols et divers relatif la mcanique des sols Gotextiles, dfinitions et descriptions dexcution
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
8.17
Section 1
Part 8
Quality Assurance
Page 179
END OF PART
QCS 2010
Part 9
Materials
Page 1
MATERIALS ................................................................................................... 2
9.1
GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 2
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
9.1.5
9.1.6
9.1.7
9.1.8
9.1.9
9.1.10
Scope
Materials from AGCC States
Product Data
Quality of Materials
Manufacturers Instructions
Samples
Shop Drawings
Alternative Materials
Owner Furnished Materials
Delivery of Materials to Government Stores
9.2
MATERIALS ................................................................................................... 4
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
Ordering Materials
Delivery of Materials to the Site
Handling or Materials
Storage of Materials on the Site
Protection of Materials
9.3
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
General
In-situ Testing and Nuclear Density Measuring Devices
Test Certificates
9.4
SPECIAL MATERIALS................................................................................... 7
9.4.1
QCS 2010
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
7
7
9.
Part 9
Materials
Page 2
9.
MATERIALS
9.1
GENERAL
9.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for materials incorporated in the Works. In the context
of this Part, components and items of equipment are to be considered as materials and all
requirements applicable to materials are likewise applicable to components and items of
equipment.
Submittals
Quality Assurance
9.1.2
All materials and components for the Works shall be obtained from the member states of
the Arab Gulf Co-operation Council unless the Engineer approves the use of alternative
sources.
9.1.3
Product Data
Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit product data for all
materials to be incorporated in the Works.
Product data shall be explicit with regard to the actual material to be incorporated in the
Works.
The product data shall provide sufficient information for the Engineer to determine that the
products submitted conform to the requirements of the Project Documentation.
Where product data submittals include manufacturers catalogues which detail more than
one product or size, capacity etc. of the same product, the Contractor shall clearly indicate
which product is being presented for approval.
Product data shall be presented on A4 size paper and electronic format whenever possible.
9.1.4
Quality of Materials
All materials required to comply with a particular national or international standard shall be
marked with the certified trade mark associated with the organisation responsible for the
standard. The mark of conformity of any approved third party certification body or an
equivalent mark shall be an acceptable alternative to this requirement.
The requirements of Clause 9.1.4 shall not apply where the Engineer is satisfied and
confirms to the Contractor in writing that third party quality assured materials are not readily
available or appropriate. In such cases, and where materials are required to comply with a
particular standard or its equivalent, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer test
certificates, furnished by the supplier or manufacturer of the materials, indicating
compliance with the relevant standard.
QCS 2010
This Section
Part 9
Materials
Page 3
As soon as possible after the Contract has been awarded, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for his approval a list of proposed suppliers and sources of materials required for
the execution of the Works.
Names of additional suppliers and sources of materials may be submitted by the Contractor
during the execution of the Contract, but no source of supply shall be changed without the
Engineers approval.
A single source of supply shall be used for materials which have characteristics that:
(a)
(b)
(c)
All materials and equipment incorporated in the Works shall be designed and manufactured
or constructed to withstand the climatic conditions experienced in Qatar.
9.1.5
Manufacturers Instructions
Unless otherwise described in the Project Documentation, the use, installation, application
or fixing of materials shall be in accordance with all applicable recommendations and
instructions of the manufacturers.
The Contractor shall obtain the manufacturers instructions and recommendations relating
to all materials and proprietary articles and systems to be incorporated in the Works, and
shall keep copies of the same on site at all times for the information of the Engineer. Such
instructions and recommendation shall be considered to be part of this Specification.
Where appropriate, the Contractor shall make use of any technical advisory service offered
by manufacturers regarding use and installation of materials.
9.1.6
Samples
Samples shall be provided when requested by the Engineer or instructed by the Project
Documentation. Materials subsequently supplied shall conform to the quality of the
samples which have been approved by the Engineer.
Each sample shall bear a securely fixed label bearing the following information:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Project identification.
Contractor identification.
Sample identification including all information as to manufacturer, model, catalogue
number, finish, etc.
Space for approval signature of the Engineer.
Where samples of finished work are specified, works shall not proceed until the Engineer
has approved the sample of the finished work. Samples of finished work shall be made
under conditions similar to those which will be experienced during the construction of the
Works.
Samples which have been approved shall be carefully protected and maintained in a
manner which will not allow them to deteriorate. Unless otherwise specified or forming part
of the finished Works, samples shall be removed when no longer required by the Engineer.
All materials and workmanship shall be up to the standard of the approved samples.
QCS 2010
Part 9
Materials
Page 4
Samples shall be of sufficient size to indicate the general visual effect. The minimum
acceptable size of sheet materials shall be 300 x 300 mm.
9.1.7
Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare Shop Drawings in accordance with the relevant provisions of
Part 7, Submittals, of this Section. The Shop Drawings shall include material description
and identification where applicable.
9.1.8
Alternative Materials
The Contractor may propose the use of alternatives to materials specified in the Project
Documentation. Such proposals shall be complete with all supporting information showing
that the alternative is equal or better than the specified material in all respects.
The use of alternative materials shall only be permitted if approved by the Engineer in
writing.
9.1.9
Materials to be furnished by the Owner and installed by the Contractor shall be as specified
in the Project Documentation.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the collection and delivery to the Site of materials to
be furnished by the Owner and installed by the Contractor. The collection location of such
materials shall be as detailed in the Project Documentation.
The Owner reserves the right to place and install items of equipment, furniture, furnishings,
partitions etc., in completed or partially completed parts of the Works upon the
understanding that the exercising of such a right will not substantially interfere with the
regular progress and completion of the Works.
9.1.10
Prior to delivery to store, the Contractor shall make all items available for inspection by the
Engineer's Representative.
The Contractor shall be instructed where to deliver the items and the date on which the
delivery is to be made.
Each delivery to store shall be accompanied by a detailed delivery note, which shall be
prepared by the Contractor, in a format approved by the Engineer.
On arrival at store, all items shall be re-inspected by the Engineer's Representative, before
being accepted.
The Contractor shall be issued with a receipt for the delivered items, which have been
accepted.
9.2
MATERIALS
9.2.1
Ordering Materials
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any material which he is unable to order due to
lack of information, non-availability, or for any other reason, within sixty (60) days of the
acceptance of the Contract.
QCS 2010
Part 9
Materials
Page 5
The Contractor shall ascertain the quantities of materials for ordering from the Project
Documentation. The Bill of Quantities alone shall not be used as a basis for ordering
materials.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any delays to the Contract due to non-compliance
with this Clause.
9.2.2
Materials shall be new and shall bear complete identification. Such identification shall
include, but not be limited to, the class, model, number and type of the material. Where
materials are not so identified, the Contractor shall furnish copies of invoices or certificates
providing complete identification.
Deliveries shall be programmed to minimise handling and deterioration due to site storage.
9.2.3
Handling or Materials
Materials shall be handled in such a manner as to avoid any damage or contamination, and
in accordance with all applicable recommendations of the manufacturers.
Particular care shall be taken when handling components with lifting equipment. Slings,
lifting hooks, forks and the like should only be applied at the points indicated as being
suitable for application by the manufacturer.
9.2.4
The Contractor shall allow for delivery of all materials & equipment to site, as well as
multiple handling required in the Works. The Contractor shall also provide for adequate
storage of all materials and equipment used in the Works for the whole period of the
Contract. The said storage shall be as per the applicable Specifications of all concerned
authorities and departments.
Materials shall be stored in such a manner as to preserve their quality and condition to the
standards required by this Specification. Any recommendations made by the manufacturer
which relate to storage of materials and equipment shall be fully complied with.
The quantity of materials and equipment stored on the Site shall be consistent with that
necessary for efficient working.
Storage shall be such that any particular consignment can be readily identified by its
delivery ticket, test certificate, etc.
Materials which are liable to deteriorate shall be used in the order of delivery.
9.2.5
Protection of Materials
Particular care shall be taken to protect finished surfaces during the application of adjacent
work.
Materials which are subject to deterioration by ultra violet light shall be stored so that they
are not exposed to direct sunlight.
QCS 2010
Part 9
Materials
Page 6
TESTING OF MATERIALS
9.3.1
General
The Engineer may test any materials before they leave the manufacturers premises or after
delivery to the Site.
The Engineer may reject any materials after delivery to the Site should he consider them
unsatisfactory, notwithstanding any preliminary test and approval of the materials at the
manufacturers premises.
The costs of all tests necessary to ensure compliance with the Project Documentation,
including the cost of delivery to the testing laboratory, shall be borne by the Contractor.
Should the Engineer not inspect any materials or goods at the place of manufacture, the
Contractor shall without cost to the Contract obtain certificates of test from the supplier of
such goods and shall send such certificates to the Engineer. Such certificates shall certify
that the materials or goods concerned have been tested in accordance with the
requirements of the Specification and shall include the results of all tests carried out. The
Contractor shall provide adequate means of identifying the materials and goods delivered to
the site with the corresponding certificates.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the organisation and appointment of an approved
independent testing laboratory to carry out all the testing of materials as required by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall supply full details of the testing laboratory he proposes to
appoint including facilities, personnel, etc for the Engineers approval within 7 days of the
Engineers order to commence work on site.
All testing for compliance with the Specification shall only be carried out using laboratory
equipment, such as compression testing machines and balances, which have been
calibrated and certified by a calibration service organisation approved by the MOE.
Provision of evidence of compliance with this clause shall be as directed from time to time
by the MOE.
All samples and records shall be preserved for as long as the Engineer may direct and they
should be kept and labelled in an orderly fashion. Testing equipment and all samples and
records shall be open to inspection by the Engineer or his representative at all times.
The laboratory shall be provided with equipment and trained personnel sufficient for
carrying out all the earthworks tests referred to in the Specification. The laboratory shall be
capable of carrying out all the relevant tests at the frequency required by the Specification
and by the rate of progress required by the Contractors approved programme for the
Works.
9.3.2
No person, company nor organisation will be permitted to determine in-situ density by means
of a nuclear type density measuring device without complying with the following
requirements:
(a)
Each device held by any organisation shall have a valid calibration certificate issued
by the MOE. The validity of any such certificate shall not exceed six months.
QCS 2010
9.3
(c)
(d)
(e)
Materials
Page 7
Calibration certificates will only be issued for any particular device if MOE is satisfied
that the identified storage location of the device is, suitable and safe, and that an
approved radiation officer has been appointed by the organisation.
General and detailed storage location plan is to be provided to MOE for each device.
A letter of undertaking from the organisation stating that for each device should there
be a need for it to be stored elsewhere at anytime overnight MOE will be so notified in
advance to ensure compliance of safe storage requirements.
Only persons holding a valid user certificate issued by MOE shall be permitted to
operate these devices. Such certificates shall only be issued after the applicant has
demonstrated competence in operating the device both technically and safely. The
validity of any certificate shall not exceed six months.
During operation of the device the operator and any assistance shall wear suitable film
badges or a personnel radiation warning alarms. Evidence of the organisation having
these available during the intended validity of a user certificate shall be required prior
to the issue of such user certificates.
Non-adherence to the above requirements will be reported to the relevant authorities
for suitable action.
9.3.3
Test Certificates
Materials which have been tested shall be issued with a test certificate. The test certificate
shall clearly indicate whether the material has passed or failed any test or tests performed.
The test certificates shall also clearly indicate whether the tested material is suitable for use
or inclusion in the Works.
Test certificates shall be issued by the manufacturer, the Central Materials Laboratory, an
approved third party testing laboratory or other organisation as designated in the Project
Documentation or as directed by the Engineer.
9.4
SPECIAL MATERIALS
9.4.1
The specification of proprietary articles and systems supplied by particular firms is not
necessarily binding upon the Contractor. If approval is obtained, the Contractor may order
from other sources supplying articles of equal quality.
The Contractor shall submit full details and samples of the alternatives offered together with
samples of the items specified to enable a proper comparison to be made. A minimum of
twenty one (21) days shall be allowed from the date all information required by the Engineer
has been submitted for his decision as to the acceptability or otherwise of the alternative
offered.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included for the specified item in the Contract
price, not his proposed alternative.
If so directed, the Contractor shall have the proposed alternative tested for quality, strength,
durability, finish or efficiency by an approved testing laboratory.
If the Engineer accepts an alternative, any costs resulting, including all engineering and
design services, and changes or adjustments in materials or work directly or indirectly
brought about by the substitution, shall be borne by the Contractor.
On completion of the Contract, all instructions and recommendations for proprietary articles
and systems shall be neatly assembled in suitable folders or binders, provided with a
contents list and handed to the Engineer.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
(f)
Part 9
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 1
10.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
10.1.6
10.1.7
10.1.8
Scope
Responsibility
Contractors Occupational Health and Safety Organisation Plan
Reporting Accidents
General Sanitation
Safety Notice Board
Compensation for Damage
Occupational Health and Safety Performance
10.2
10.2.1
10.2.2
10.2.3
10.2.4
10.2.5
10.2.6
10.3
10.3.1 Permits
10.3.2 Guarantee
10.3.3 Mechanical Plant, Machinery and Equipment
10.3.4 Existing Utilities
10.3.5 Excavations
10.3.6 Warning Signs
10.3.7 Confined Spaces
10.3.8 Lifting Operation
10.3.9 Lifting Gear
10.3.10Scaffolding
10.3.11Hot work and Welding
10.3.12Compressed Gas Cylinders
10.3.13Working at Height
10.3.14Electrical
10.4
10
11
11
12
12
14
14
15
16
16
17
18
18
20
21
10.5.1 General
10.5.2 Emergency Equipment
10.5.3 Hazardous Substances
10.6
5
8
8
8
9
10
FIRST AID.................................................................................................... 21
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
21
22
23
24
10.7
WELFARE OF WORKMEN.......................................................................... 25
10.7.1
10.7.2
10.7.3
10.7.4
25
25
26
27
10.
QCS 2010
10.
Section 1
Part 10
Page 2
10.1
GENERAL
10.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies Health, Safety and welfare issues associated with construction practices
employed in the execution of the Works.
Section 11
10.1.2
Responsibility
The Contractor shall conform to all Acts, Orders and Regulations made by any official
authority with respect to Occupational Health and Safety.
The Contractor shall note that Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) shall be treated with
high importance at all stages of the Contract. Contractor shall understand that the Contract
Price includes the Execution Programme for provision and implementation of an
Occupational Health and Safety Policy and Plan to ensure the highest standards are
enforced throughout Construction, Pre-commissioning and Commissioning.
The Contractor shall ensure that Contractor Personnel and Subcontractors employees
comply with all requirements of latest revision of Qatar Construction Specification QCS,
Qatar Law No.14 of the Year 2004 The Labour Law, Qatar Traffic Law No. 19 of the Year
2007, and Environmental Protection Law No. 30 of the Year 2002. Compliance with the
standards shall be considered as a minimum requirement and Contractor shall establish
additional arrangements as circumstances may require. Any failure by Contractor to obtain
copies of that mentioned laws applicable to the Contract shall in no way relieve the
Contractor from any responsibilities or obligation under the Contract.
The Contractors Representative shall be responsible for all Occupational Health and Safety
matters during the performance of the Work up to and including the Completion Date. The
Contractors Representative shall ensure that an effective Occupational Health and Safety
management organization is maintained at all times to undertake the duties to comply with
this requirement.
This Section
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 3
10.1.3
The Contractor shall submit an Occupational Health and Safety Organisation Plan for
Engineers approval within Thirty (30) days of the start of the Contract.
The Occupational Health and Safety Organisation Plan shall provide the names,
qualifications, experience and skills of all the Safety Team and key support staff.
The Contractor shall submit the names of the following to the Engineer for approval:The details of its proposed Occupational Health and Safety Manager. The minimum
education for the proposed Occupational Health and Safety Manager are but not
limited to Degree, Diploma, Certificate, School and the ability to communicate with all
nationalities, plus Professional OHS Qualification by Examination (NEBOSH, IOSH,
OSHA, ... etc), Management Qualification, Relevant Training Attendance. The
Engineer shall review the details and if necessary interview the proposed individual to
assess his/her suitability for the position prior to giving approval for appointment. The
Contractor is not permitted to execute any form of Work on the Worksite until such
time as an approved Occupational Health and Safety Manager has been deployed on
a full time basis to the Worksite. The Contractor shall not remove the appointed
Occupational Health and Safety Manager without prior approval from the Engineer.
(b)
Deputy Occupational Health and Safety Manager who is capable of performing all of
the duties of the Occupational Health and Safety Manager in the event of his
absence. The procedure outlined in Clause (a) above applies equally to the
appointment of the Deputy Occupational Health and Safety Manager.
The Contractor shall appoint Occupational Health and Safety Officers and support staff in
sufficient numbers to ensure the effective function of the Occupational Health and Safety
discipline within the Contractors organisation. The Contractor shall appoint and deploy full
time on the Worksite one Occupational Health and Safety Officer for each and every 50
persons employed at the Worksite. For a less than 50 persons employed at the Worksite, a
minimum of one (1) Safety Officer shall be present on site during all working hours each day
throughout the Contract period. This is in addition to the Occupational Health and Safety
Manager and his Deputy.
The Safety Officers shall have no other duties, either on-site or off-site, other than
Occupational Health and Safety duties, and shall be exclusive to one site.
The Contractor shall ensure that each and every Subcontractor employed on the Worksite
appoints suitably qualified Occupational Health and Safety staff to ensure the effective
function of the Occupational Health and Safety discipline within the Subcontractors
organisation. The Subcontractor shall appoint and deploy full time on the Worksite one
Occupational Health and Safety Officer for each and every 50 persons that they employ at
the Worksite. Any Subcontractor that employs more than 100 persons will appoint an
Occupational Health and Safety Manager. This is in addition to the Occupation Occupational
Health and Safety Officers.
10.1.4
Reporting Accidents
The Contractor shall promptly report to the Engineer any accident whatsoever arising out of,
or in connection with, the Works whether on or adjacent to the Site which caused death,
personal injury or property damage, giving full details and enclosing statements of witnesses.
Promptly shall mean immediately where it impacts on the operation of the project and in all
cases never more than 24 hours.
The Contractor shall implement arrangements for effectively managing any emergency
incident that may occur as a result of Work and/or on the Worksite.
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for emergency preparedness
including, but not limited to, medical equipment and facilities, trained personnel,
communication systems, transportation, search and rescue equipment.
(a)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 4
The Contractor shall produce and submit to the Engineer monthly performance reports and
incident reports. Reports shall be in the format approved by the Engineer.
10.1.5
General Sanitation
The Contractor shall maintain the Site and all working areas in a sanitary condition and in all
matters of health and sanitation shall comply with the requirements of the Supreme Council
of Health and the Public Works Authority.
The Contractor is responsible for all measures necessary to prevent the breeding of
mosquitoes on the Site for the duration of the Contract.
The Contractor shall ensure that pests are not permitted to the Site facility by initiating a
routine pest control program. Non toxic pest control methods shall be used.
The disposal surplus water and the accompanying growth of trees and the proliferation of insects
and rodents. Does the site cause an environmentally danger to the surrounding area?
10.1.6
The Contractor shall set up and maintain (cleaned and legible) throughout the course of the
Contract safety notice boards in prominent places on the Site. These notice boards shall be
located in positions approved by the Engineer such that they are clearly visible to the
Contractors employees. They shall be fully illustrated and provide details of key safety
procedures to be followed.
In all other languages which are the mother tongue of five or more of the Contractors
employees, or
The preferred languages (can be understood) by the workers on the Worksite.
The Contractors employees shall be made fully aware of the notice boards prior to
commencing duties on Site.
The Contractor shall maintain up to date copies of all industry codes and standards that
apply to the Work.
10.1.7
Claims for compensation arising from damage or injury caused by the Contractors failure to
provide adequate Occupational Health and Safety measures shall be the sole responsibility
of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any claim made against him which is in any way
connected to the Contract.
The Contractor is required to copy to the Engineer any formal Occupational Health and
Safety related communication between the Contractor and enforcing authorities or
government organizations.
10.1.8
The Contractor shall ensure acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of all
Subcontractors, visitors, vendors, public and other parties that may enter the Worksite.
Should acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance not be maintained by the
Contractor then the Engineer may, in addition to any other amounts withheld under the
Contract, withhold up to 10% of the amount of any interim invoice issued by the Contractor.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 5
10.2.1
The Contractor shall prepare a Contract specific Occupational Health and Safety Plan (the
Safety Plan) and submit a Safety Plan to the Engineer for review and approval within thirty
(30) days of the award of the Contract. The Contractor is not permitted to Work on the
Worksite until such time as the Plan has been approved by Engineer.
The Safety Plan shall include the Contractors proposals for the maintenance of safety on the
Site. These proposals shall address the safety measures applicable with respect to all tasks
to be undertaken in the construction of the Works.
The Safety Plan shall include the Contractors proposals for accident prevention. Accident
prevention shall include but not be limited to training, monitoring and review of safety related
procedures, enforcement of safety related matters and promoting safety awareness.
The Safety Plan shall include a safety organisation chart showing the names and
responsibility of all safety personnel deployed both on and off the Worksite to maintain
acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of the Contract and the Work at all
times, even outside the normal working hours, in particular night-time and holiday working.
(refer to 10.1.3)
The Contractor is required to work in areas where dangerous concentrations of gases may
be present in manholes, trench excavations and the like. It is the Contractors responsibility
to provide all necessary detection equipment and to ensure that, if toxic or explosive gases
are found, adequate measures are taken to protect his staff, workmen and members of the
public.
The Contractor shall regularly review the suitability of the Safety Plan. The Contractor shall
undertake a full formal review of the Safety Plan annually on the date of award of the
Contract and submit the findings of the review to the Engineer within 14 days of that date
along with an amended plan should any amendment be required.
The Safety Plan shall contain the Contractors Occupational Health and Safety Policy. (refer
to 10.2.2)
The Safety Plan shall detail the Contractors approach to risk assessment and include a
matrix showing the levels of risk and their acceptability.
10
The Safety Plan shall include the contract risk assessment and detail the arrangements for
ensuring that it is updated to reflect any changes throughout the duration of the Work.
11
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for undertaking job hazard analysis and
ensuring that such analysis is included in each and every method statement.
12
The Safety Plan shall detail the management arrangements and standards to be used for
each of the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
Scaffolding
Suspended Working Platforms
Fall Prevention and Fall Arrest
Prevention of Falling Objects
Excavations
Electricity
Structural Steel Erection
Demolition and Dismantling
False work and Formwork
Reinforcement and Concreting
10.2
QCS 2010
Part 10
Page 6
13
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements that the Contractor shall use to ensure
acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of all Subcontractors that may
enter the Worksite. It shall detail the arrangements for evaluating Subcontractors prior to
them being contracted to undertake Work. It shall detail the methods that the Contractor
shall use to monitor their work and the penalties that shall be imposed should acceptable
standards not be maintained.
14
The Safety Plan shall detail the manner in which the Contractor shall review, approve and
incorporate all Subcontractor Occupational Health and Safety plans, risk assessments and
method statements and incorporate them into their Occupational Health and Safety
management system.
15
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements that the Contractor shall use to ensure
acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of all persons on the Worksite. In
particular it shall detail the arrangements for penalties and disciplinary action that shall be
taken should Contractor Personnel, Subcontractor employees or any other person on the
Worksite not comply with Occupational Health and Safety requirements.
16
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements that the Contractor shall use to control and
ensure acceptable Occupational Health and Safety performance of visitors and delivery
personnel that may enter the Worksite.
17
The Safety Plan shall detail the Contractors arrangements for effectively managing any
emergency incident that may occur as a result of Work or on the Worksite. The detail shall
include the facilities required for emergency preparedness.
18
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for notification and investigation of any
incident that may occur as a result of Work or on the Worksite.
19
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for the Contractors monthly performance
reporting and incident reporting.
20
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for assessing the general Health of
employees and any job specific Health checks that may be required.
21
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for self inspection and auditing that shall be
used to monitor the Work.
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
(s)
(t)
(u)
(v)
(w)
(x)
(y)
(z)
(aa)
(bb)
(cc)
(dd)
(ee)
(ff)
(gg)
Section 1
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 7
22
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for tracking and effectively closing any
Occupational Health and Safety related nonconformity or deficiency that may be identified as
a result of monitoring. Written records of inspection, auditing and tracking shall be
maintained and made available to any representative of Client on request.
23
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements for ensuring that all Contractor Personnel and
Subcontractor employees are trained and competent to undertake their work in accordance
with the required standards. In particular the Safety plan shall detail the training and
competence requirements for the following employees;
Supervisors
Electricians
Mobile plant and vehicle operators
Crane and lifting appliance operators
Riggers
Excavation Supervisors
Machinery operators
Scaffolders
Scaffolding Supervisors
Confined space workers
Confined space supervisors
All persons working at height
24
The Safety Plan shall detail the training arrangements specify the type and nature of training
to be given including but not limited to induction, pre-work briefings, tool box talks, general
awareness training, skills training and formal training conducted by training professionals or
agencies. Written records of the attendees, training given and assessment of competency
shall be maintained by the Contractor and made available for inspection by any
representative of Client upon request.
25
The Safety Plan shall detail the Contractors arrangements for promoting the awareness of
Occupational Health and Safety issues through notices, posters, newsletters, booklets,
Occupational Health and Safety alerts and any other means. All such information shall be
provided in the languages preferred by the training recipients of the training.
26
The Safety Plan shall detail the arrangements that the Contractor shall make to reinforce
good performance. Such arrangements shall include incentive schemes to reward
Contractor Personnel, Subcontractor employees or areas of Work that demonstrate
exemplary Occupational Health and Safety performance.
27
The Safety Plan shall include details of all meetings that are held to specifically deal with
Occupational Health and Safety issues. In particular the Contractor shall hold a monthly
meeting chaired by the Contractors Representative, which Client shall be invited to attend,
with the following items on the agenda;
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
28
Suitability of the Contractors Occupational Health and Safety organization for the ongoing and planned Work;
Effectiveness of the Contractors Occupational Health and Safety management
system;
Significant areas of planned activity and associated risk;
Method statement review and job hazard analysis planning;
Tracking and closure of any identified deficiencies or nonconformities;
Incident review;
Occupational Health and Safety promotion planning;
Training needs assessment;
Auditing and inspection planning;
The Occupational Health and Safety Plan shall describe the Contractors Safety
Management System that will be used throughout and shall conform with all requirements
defined within the Contract and related documentation The contents shall include but not be
limited to the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
QCS 2010
Part 10
Page 8
Front Cover
Table of Contents
Project Scope, Requirements and Occupational Health and Safety Objectives
Occupational Health and Safety Policy and BS OHSAS 18001 Certificate (if applicable)
Control of Occupational Health and Safety Plan
Reference Documentation
Safety Organisation and Responsibilities
Subcontractor Occupational Health and Safety
Method Statements
Risk Assessments and Job Hazard Analysis
Non-conformance, Corrective and Preventative Action
Incident Reporting
Audits
Training
Key Performance Indicators and Continual Improvement
Management Review
Safety Meetings
Monthly Safety Report
Appendices
10.2.2
The Contractor shall comply with the Client vision, mission and strategic objectives.
The Contractor shall develop and implement its own written Occupational Health and Safety
Policy which shall be Project specific and demonstrate the Contractors understanding of
and commitment to maintaining standards of Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) that are
consistent with and an integral part of the Contractors business strategy.
10.2.3
The Contractor shall use the process of risk management to identify hazards, evaluate risk
and determine appropriate control measures to reduce risk to an acceptable level. The
Contactor shall produce a contract risk assessment that details the level of risk associated
with each element of work identified on the program of works. The contract risk assessment
shall indicate the measures that shall be used by the Contractor to control the identified risks
to acceptable levels.
A job hazard analysis (JHA) shall be provided for Work that requires a method statement.
Method statements are to be reviewed and approved by the Contractors Health Safety
Manager prior to submission to the Engineer. The job hazard analysis shall be included as
an integral part of every method statement that is submitted to the Engineer. The job hazard
analysis shall detail each and every hazard associated with the Work, the control measures
that are required and the individual that is responsible for ensuring that such measures are
implemented. Method statements shall be approved by the Engineer before commencing
Work.
The Contractor shall inform all Contractor Personnel and Subcontractors employees of the
hazards associated with the Work.
10.2.4
Intervention
A system of positive intervention shall be used throughout the Project and the Contractor
shall adopt the system by authorizing and requiring all Contractor Personnel and
Subcontractor employees to intervene in any unsafe act or condition and take immediate
corrective action to prevent any incident occurring.
Work may be monitored by any representative of Client who may intervene in any unsafe act
or condition and require the Contractor to take immediate corrective action to prevent any
incident occurring.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
(s)
Section 1
QCS 2010
3
Section 1
Part 10
Page 9
The Contractor is required to acknowledge that the system of positive intervention in use on
the Project is one that shall enhance the following;
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
The Contractor may be the focus of Occupational Health and Safety audits conducted by any
representative of Client. The Contractor is required to cooperate with such audits and to
acknowledge all audit findings. The Contractor shall take all corrective and preventive
actions that may be required to address any nonconformity identified during such auditing.
The Contractor may be the focus of Occupational Health and Safety inspections conducted
by any representative of Client. The Contractor is required to cooperate with and
acknowledge such inspections and take all corrective and preventive actions that may arise
as the result of such inspections.
The Contractor shall undertake routine Occupational Health and Safety inspections and
audits for the ongoing Work. Written records of inspections and audits shall be maintained
and made available to any representative of Client upon request.
The Contractor may be issued with stop work instructions from the Engineer for any
observed cases of serious or imminent danger associated with the Work. On receipt of a
stop work instruction the Contractor shall refrain from work until such time as remedial action
has been taken to alleviate the serious or imminent danger and to prevent it reoccurring.
The Contractor shall stop work if any unknown or unplanned conditions occur that give rise
to serious or imminent danger. In such circumstances the Contractor shall assess the risks
associated with any remedial work required and revise the method statements and job
hazard analysis. The revised method statement shall be reviewed and approved by the
Contractors Occupational Health and Safety Manager. Revised method statements shall be
approved by the Engineer before recommencing Work.
10.2.5
Training
The Contractor shall conduct training including contract specific induction, pre-work
briefings, tool box talks, general awareness training, skills training and formal training
conducted by training professionals or agencies. The contract specific induction will be at
least 2 hours duration, approved by the Engineer and provided for all persons that enter the
Worksite. Such induction training will be reviewed, revised and repeated for all persons that
enter the Worksite at periods not exceeding 6 months throughout the duration of the Work.
All training shall be provided in the languages preferred by the recipients of the training.
The Contractor is required to provide employees of Client with Occupational Health and
Safety training relating to Work undertaken by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide all Contractor Personnel and Subcontractors employees with
individually unique Contract specific photo identity cards. Such cards shall be made
available to any representative of Client on request. The Contractor shall not permit any
Contractor Personnel or Subcontractors employees to access the Worksite unless they
have been issued with their individually unique photo identity card. Such cards will not be
issued prior to the Contractor Personnel or Subcontractors employee attending the
Contractors induction training course.
QCS 2010
4
Section 1
Part 10
Page 10
The Contractor shall appoint a competent supervisor for each and every area of the following
Work activities
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
The Contractors shall conduct emergency drills to thoroughly test its emergency
preparedness and response within 6 months of the date of award of the Contract and
thereafter at periods not exceeding 6 months throughout the duration of the Work.
The Contractor shall hold a Contract specific Occupational Health and Safety meeting
chaired by the Contractors representative on a monthly basis throughout the duration of the
WORK. Additionally the Contractor shall include Occupational Health and Safety as an item
on the agenda for each and every meeting held and ensure that the subject is actively
discussed.
The Contractor shall provide contract specific safe practice booklets for each and every
person employed on the Worksite and provide training on the content of the booklet.
10.2.6
Method Statements
As part of the Safety Plan the Contractor shall submit a Method Statement Schedule to the
Engineer for approval no later than thirty (30) days from the start of the Contract.
The Method Statement Schedule shall define the Method Statements to be prepared for the
Works and the target dates for their submission to the Engineer for his approval.
Introduction/Scope
Location and identification of the work covered by the method statement
Permits and Licenses Required
Specific Occupational Health and Safety Issues including Risk Assessments and Job
Hazard Analysis
Environmental Issues
Quality Issues
Responsibilities
Sequence of Work
Resources
Drawings and Sketches
Reference documentation
Method Statements are required for all operations including temporary works.
No work covered by the Method Statement shall begin until it has been approved by the
Engineer.
For additional requirements relating to the preparation of method statements refer to Part 8,
Quality Assurance and Section 11, Occupational Health and Safety.
10.3
10.3.1
Permits
A permit-to-work system (Hot work, Excavation, Scaffolding & Electric work) shall be
observed (correctly issued, Signed & Client requirement enforced) when undertaking any
work on an existing utility, service, item of equipment or structure.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 11
A permit-to-enter system shall be observed (correctly issued, Signed & Client requirement
enforced) when undertaking any work in a confined space.
10.3.2
Guarantee
Where the Contract requires work to be carried out within or adjacent to any pipeline or at a
sewage treatment plant, the Contractor shall comply with any requirement of the Public
Works Authority.
10.3.3
Sufficient suitable standby plant shall be immediately available in cases where the safety of
the Works or of personnel depends upon mechanical plant.
Test and thorough examination by a competent person of all equipment that is capable of
storing energy, such as air receivers and pressure vessels, is required at periods not
exceeding 12 months. Reports of such test and examination will be held on the Worksite and
made available to the employer on request.
The Contractor will make arrangements for all mobile plant and vehicles that enter the
Worksite to be checked to ensure the following are provided and in good working order:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
Braking systems
Steering systems
Gauges and warning lights
Operating controls
Windscreens and wipers
Reversing alarms
Rear view mirrors
Roll over protection devices
Wheels, tyres, track
Pneumatic and hydraulic hoses
Seat belts and anchors
Fuel lines and tanks
Electrical control systems
Suspension and stabilization systems
Bodywork, covers and panels
Mobile plant and vehicles that are defective will be removed from use in work areas and
taken to a repair facility on the Worksite or removed from the Worksite.
Repair work will only be carried out by trained and authorised mobile plant and vehicle repair
technicians.
Whenever maintenance work is ongoing the machinery or equipment will be isolated and deenergized.
All mobile plant and vehicle operators will hold relevant Qatari driving licenses for the
category of plant or vehicle that they operate. In addition operators of mobile plant will be in
possession of a 3rd party training certificate to verify that they have the skills necessary for
safe use of the plant.
Operators will use mobile plant and vehicles only in accordance with their operating
manuals.
The Contractor will conduct a job hazard analysis for each item of machinery and equipment
that will be used.
10
The following site rules will be observed by all mobile plant and vehicle operators:
(a)
Mobile plant and delivery vehicles will not be reversed without a banks man in
attendance.
QCS 2010
(b)
Section 1
Part 10
Page 12
No passengers will be carried on mobile plant or vehicles other that in seats that are
specifically designed for carrying passengers.
11
The Contractor shall prevent oil / fuel leak causing environmentally pollution.
12
The Contractor will eliminate or reduce the associated hazards for construction lift such as,
construction lift failure, falling persons and falling objects by meeting or bettering these
specifications. And:
(a)
(b)
All construction lifts will have flat base plates without holes or openings, enclosed
sides and roof that are designed to prevent from falling objects.
All construction lifts will have overload protection devices that prevent movement of
the platform if it is overloaded.
Existing Utilities
Prior to excavating in any area, the location of existing utilities shall be confirmed from asbuilt drawings, contact with utility authorities and trial holes.
Excavation in the vicinity of any utility shall be carried out to the requirements of the utility
owner.
Protection for utilities is the least effective means of controlling any associated risk. Where
Contractors use this method the following will be provided:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Marker posts or blocks that clearly indicate the nature, depth and path of all
underground utilities.
Where traffic routes pass over underground utilities temporary protection will be
provided. Warning signs stating the maximum vehicle weight that may safely cross the
utility will be positioned on the access route at each side of the utility.
Temporary barriers or fences that run parallel to the route of any overhead utilities.
Warning signs detailing the nature of any overhead utilities on the barriers or fences.
Where traffic routes pass below overhead utilities warning signs stating the maximum
vehicle height and height restrictors will be positioned on the access route at each
side of the overhead utility.
Where any construction activity adjacent to a utility is undertaken the minimum clearance
distances will be clearly established and communicated to each and every person involved
with the construction activity.
Traffic routes and material stockpile areas will be clearly identified and established prior to
excavation work commencing. All excavation areas, traffic routes and stockpile areas are to
be surveyed for overhead services. Any services identified are to be removed or clearly
marked with height restrictors and warning information.
10.3.5
Excavations
During the planning stage all materials and equipment required for the safe excavation work
must be clearly identified. Such equipment and materials may include the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
Shoring
Solid Barriers
Vehicle stop blocks
Access ladders or scaffolding
Ventilation
Lighting
Signage
Pumps
Generators
Air Monitoring Devices
Movement Monitoring Equipment
Rescue Equipment
For all excavation work a competent excavation supervisor will be appointed. The level of
training and experience required to determine competence will vary depending on the
10.3.4
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 13
complexity of the excavation. He will have previous experience of the type of excavation
work to be undertaken and formal Occupational Health and Safety training relating to the
safety of excavation work.
Once the design requirements are known a job hazard analysis of the excavation work will
be completed by the excavation supervisor with the assistance of Occupational Health and
Safety staff and engineers as required. The Job Hazard Analysis will clearly identify the job
specific risks and control measures for the excavation work.
Prior to commencement of any excavation work all persons involved will be given a pre-work
briefing based on the Job Hazard Analysis relating to the risks and required control
measures for the excavation work. The appointed excavation supervisor will be responsible
for presenting and recording the briefing.
Prior to commencement of work all materials, plant and equipment will be checked to ensure
that they are in good condition. In particular the condition of all mechanical excavators will be
checked to ensure that:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
All windows in the drivers cab are clean, unbroken and unobstructed.
Rear view mirrors are securely attached, unbroken and clean.
All track plates and connectors are in good condition and secured with proprietary
locking pins.
All dipper arm joints and attachments are secured with proprietary pins and locking
pins.
All task and indicator lighting is in working order.
Trucks will only be operated by persons with valid Qatari driving licenses. Plant such as
excavators, loading shovels etc shall only be operated by trained and competent operators
that hold valid 3rd Party certification for the type of plant being operated. This certification is
required in addition to Qatari driving license requirements.
When the reversing of trucks is necessary for the collection or delivery of materials a banks
man will be in attendance. All banks men will be provided with high visibility clothing and be
trained in the safety aspects of reversing vehicles. Where vehicles are reversing up to an
excavation or travelling alongside an excavation vehicle stop blocks or vehicle barriers will
be provided to prevent them falling into the excavation.
Continuous adequate solid barriers will be placed around all excavations over 1.2m deep at
a distance at least of 1.2m. Where night time pedestrian or vehicle access is adjacent to
excavation then all solid barriers will be fitted with warning lights.
Pedestrian access to and from all excavations will be by means of ladder or adequately
constructed staircases. The possibility of a person falling from a height of more than 2m from
the access will be prevented. The horizontal distance between access points will not exceed
15m.
10
All ladders used on the Project will be manufactured in accordance with an internationally
recognised standard. Any ladder that is found to be defective will be removed from use
immediately.
11
All straight ladders will be positioned at an angle to minimize the risk of slipping or falling
backwards. The distance between the base of the vertical plane and the base of the ladder
will be 1 unit out for each 4 units in height of the vertical plane.
12
Ladders that are used to gain access from one level to another will extend at least 1m above
the upper level surface. Where a general access ladder run extends a distance of more than
6m a landing point with a firm level platform and fall prevention measures will be provided at
each and every 6m.
13
Excavations shall be kept clean and tidy at all times. Accumulated waste and unused
materials will be removed from excavations on a daily basis. All excavations will be
thoroughly cleaned prior to any backfilling operations commencing.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 14
14
To prevent the risk associated with falling objects excavated materials, other materials and
equipment shall not be stored at the edge of any excavation. A clear distance of 2m shall be
maintained around all excavations.
10.3.6
Warning Signs
The Contractor shall set up and maintain (cleaned and legible) throughout the course of the
Contract enough traffic diversion signboard and adequate warning signs & guides.
Warning signs will clearly state the nature of the hazard and instruct people of the correct
actions to take. Warning signs will be manufactures in accordance with internationally
recognised standards. All signs will be in English, Arabic and the languages preferred (can
be understand) by the workers on the Worksite.
Barriers will be made of solid materials and be positioned continuously around the
hazardous area. The Contractor will provide barriers that are strong enough to prevent
people or vehicles gaining entry. The practice of using soft barriers such as rope, warning
tape, thin reinforcement bar and traffic cones are prohibited.
10.3.7
Confined Spaces
Entry into a confined space will only be permitted where a competent person is appointed to
directly supervise the work. The competent person will hold a certificate of training or license
that is issued by a 3rd party. The competent person will be appointed in writing by the
Contractor and the appointment will be copied to the employer.
Any person that enters into a confined space will have received formal training in the safe
methods of entry and working in a confined space. Such training will include the
arrangements for emergency communication and response. In addition every person that
enters into a confined space will be given a briefing by the appointed competent person
relating to the specific hazards of the work and the control measures that have been detailed
in the job hazard analysis.
Any person that acts as an attendant for confined space work will have received formal
training in the safe methods of rescue from a confined space and the arrangements for
emergency communications with external emergency services.
The contractor will only permit trained workers, under the direct supervision of an authorised
competent person, with confined space attendants present, to enter a confined space.
Internal combustion engines will not be taken into a confined space or operated in a position
where their exhaust gasses may be drawn into the confined space.
Persons entering into a confined space will wear a full body rescue harness that is attached
to a rescue line anchored outside the confined space
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
QCS 2010
7
Section 1
Part 10
Page 15
The contractor will implement a safe working procedure for confined space entry that
includes the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
10.3.8
Lifting Operation
The Contractor will appoint a competent lifting operations supervisor for the Worksite. The
lifting operation supervisor will ensure that the requirements of this specification are met at
all times.
Rigging of loads and signalling of cranes will be undertaken only by trained and competent
persons. All riggers will be required to wear a blue construction safety helmet and a red high
visibility vest for the purpose of easy identification on the Worksite.
Cranes will only be operated by trained and competent operators who are in possession of
an operators license issued by a 3rd party. In addition appropriate Qatari driving licenses are
required for all mobile equipments.
A thorough examination of each lifting appliance will be made by a 3rd party inspector at
periods not exceeding 12 months and after substantial re-erection, alteration or repair. Load
capacity to be displayed.
All lifting appliances on the Worksite will have a copy of the manufacturers operating manual
and load rating charts available for use and kept with the operator cabinet or machine.
Before a mobile crane is positioned for a lift, attention will be paid to the condition of the ground
upon which the crane will stand, as this will be subjected to high point-loadings from outriggers
or tyres. Dependent upon the nature of the ground and/or the size of the crane to be used, a
special hard standing may have to be prepared.
The maximum safe working wind speeds for all construction activity and in particular lifting
operations and Working at height activity is 25 Knots. The construction will monitor the
weather conditions and suspend work when wind speeds in excess of the maximum safe
working speeds are anticipated.
Outriggers will be properly set and locked if a locking device is provided. When controlled
remotely from the cab, the operator will make a physical check to ensure that each pad has an
adequate bearing before a load is lifted. Sound timber packing or metal plates will be used under
each outrigger pad to distribute the load. It is essential that outriggers are supported at the
jacking points and not under the outrigger beams. Also, lifting location to be barrier off.
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 16
A method statement and job hazard analysis will be provided to the Engineer for all structural
steel erection activity. No structural steelwork erection will commence prior to approval of the
method statement and job hazard analysis by the Engineer. All structural steel erectors will
be fully conversant with the construction method, sequence and hazard control measures
prior to any work activity commencing.
10.3.9
Lifting Gear
Lifting gear means any chain sling, rope sling, or similar gear, and any ring, link, hook, plate
clamp, shackle, swivel or eye bolt, used on the Worksite.
All lifting gear will be subjected to a thorough examination by a competent person from 3rd party
at intervals not exceeding 6 months. Identity number and SWL to be check.
A wire rope used in raising, lowering or suspension of a load, will not be used if it is kinked,
significantly rusted, the core is visible or the rope has visible broken wires, exceeding 5% of the
total or in any length equal to 10 times the diameter of the rope.
Riggers will check the condition of lifting gear prior to each and every lift.
Any lifting gear that is found to be defective will be removed from service and sprayed with red
paint to indicate that it is not to be used. All defective equipment will be removed from the
Worksite.
A system will be established on the Worksite for storage of all lifting equipment not regularly in
use. Such equipment will not be left in the work areas.
10.3.10 Scaffolding
1
For all scaffolding construction activity and dismantling activity a competent scaffolding
supervisor will be appointed. The level of training and experience required to determine
competence will vary depending on the complexity of the scaffolding structure to be erected
or dismantling. Industry standards and codes detail competency requirements.
All employees involved in scaffolding construction activities and dismantling activity will be
trained in the safe methods of working and in particular the manner in which fall prevention
or arrest is to be achieved. Contractors will maintain detailed information of the training
provided and the methods that they have used for assessment of competency and suitability
for all employees undertaking scaffolding construction activities.
All scaffolding erection areas and dismantling areas will be provided with barriers and
warning signs to exclude all personnel that are not specifically involved with the scaffolding
construction and dismantling activity. Where such areas are adjacent to roadways barriers
with a capability to prevent vehicles entering the area will be erected or dismantling. Where
such areas are adjacent to members of the public or 3rd parties then screening and falling
object protection will be provided. The appointed scaffolding supervisor is to be made
responsible for ensuring that exclusion zones are in place and maintained at all times whilst
scaffolding construction and dismantling activity is ongoing.
All materials being used for scaffolding construction will be checked prior to them being used
to ensure they are in good condition. Any materials found to be defective will be clearly
marked as defective and discarded or removed from the construction area to ensure that
they are not used.
Scaffolding that has been constructed in accordance with the design will be inspected for
use by displaying green scaff tag at all access points of the scaffolding detailing the following
information:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
QCS 2010
(e)
Section 1
Part 10
Page 17
The person making the scaffold inspection will maintain written details of the inspection that
they have conducted to enable them to verify their scaff tag system.
All scaffolding that does not display green scaff tag for use will be fitted with red scaff tag
states that the scaffolding is not fit for use and the access points will be removed or made
unusable.
Users of scaffolding will at all times conduct their work in a manner that eliminates the
possibility of falling objects.
Users of scaffolding are to be prohibited from altering or dismantling any part of scaffolding.
10
Users of scaffolding are required to maintain unobstructed access and egress at all times. All
debris and materials no longer required will be removed from scaffolding on a daily basis. All
materials and equipment used on scaffolding will be stored in a manner that does not
obstruct the free movement of the people using the scaffolding.
11
12
Before any dismantling activity is undertaken on scaffolding it will be removed from use. All
green scaff tag will be removed and replaced with red scaff tag which is not fit for use and all
scaffolding access points will be removed or made unusable.
The contractor will only use electric welding equipment in accordance with the following
requirements:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
Welding cables and equipment will be properly maintained and inspected before use.
Defective equipment will be removed from use and arrangement for repair will be
made.
Electric welding cables are to be kept as short as possible and routed away from
pedestrian walkway areas.
Electric welding operations will only be undertaken with earth return electrodes
connected to the work piece.
All connections between welding equipment and welding cables will be securely
bolted.
Pipelines containing flammable liquids or gases, or electrical cables will not be used
as a ground.
When electrode holders are to be left unattended, the electrodes will be removed and
the holder placed where it is protected from unintentional contact.
A fire resistant container will be provided for spent electrode stubs.
Welding machines will be turned off when being moved or when the equipment is not
in use.
Tanks, vessels and drums that have contained flammable or toxic liquids will be filled with
water or thoroughly cleaned before hot work or welding is undertaken on them.
Where coatings are present on materials to be heated the coating will be removed to prevent
the coating being heated.
Suitable portable fire extinguishing equipment will be located within 6 meters of any hot work
location.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 18
The Contractor will only use compressed fuel gasses in accordance with the following
requirements;
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(a)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
Contractors are required to reduce the risk of persons falling from height by providing a
means of fall prevention or arrest for every person on the Worksite that is exposed to a risk
of falling a distance of 2m or more.
Supervisors of persons using fall arrest systems will be trained in the correct installation, use
and maintenance of fall arrest systems. Training will be provided by a 3rd party. All persons
required to use fall arrest systems will receive formal training in safe working at height prior
to using such systems.
Safe access to the point at which a person will attach themselves to a fall arrest system will
be provided. In cases where a person using a safety harness has to detach the lanyard from
the anchor point and reattach it to a different anchor point, whilst being in a position where
the risk of falling exists, double lanyards will be used with one of the lanyards remaining
attached to the anchor point at all times.
Where any form of fall arrest system is used the contractor will put in place arrangements to
rescue any person that is caught by the fall arrest system. The rescue system and
equipment will be capable of rescuing any person that may be unconscious whilst
suspended and or suffering from suspension trauma. The system will be capable of rescuing
the suspended person within 3 minutes of the fall being arrested.
(e)
Cylinders will not be transported with regulators, gauges and hoses attached.
Cylinders will be transported in an upright position and will not be hauled in equipment
beds or truck beds on their side.
Cylinders lifted from one elevation to another will be lifted only in racks or containers
designed for that purpose. Cylinders will not be hoisted by the valve cap or by means
of magnets or slings.
Cylinders will not be used as, or placed where they may become part of, an electrical
circuit.
Cylinders will be protected from extreme heat and from being struck by moving
equipment and falling objects.
Cylinders will not be taken into a confined space.
Cylinders will not be used as rollers; will be transport on appropriate trolley.
Damaged or defective cylinders will not be used or be permitted to remain on the
Worksite.
Type of gas clearly marked on cylinders and segregation of incompatible gases is
required.
Oxygen cylinders will be kept free of oil and grease.
Cylinders will be secured in place during use and storage. Securing shall be around
the body of the cylinder, securing around the cylinder neck or cap will be prohibited.
Cylinder valves will be closed at all times when cylinders are not in use.
A key wrench is required to be in place on the valve of acetylene cylinders at all times
during use.
Fuel gas and oxygen hoses will be of different colours and will not be interchanged.
All hose, valve and regulator assemblies will incorporate a flashback arrestor.
Hoses are to be kept as short as possible and routed away from walkway areas.
Under no circumstances are damaged hoses or torches to be used.
Torches will be ignited by friction lighters or other approved devices only.
Fuel gases will only be used for the purposes of cutting or heating. They will never be
used for pressure testing or ventilation.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 19
All edges of working platforms and work areas that objects may fall from will be provided with
securely fixed continuous toe boards that are at least 200mm high.
All holes and openings in floor areas will be fitted with temporary covers to prevent objects
falling to lower levels of the structure.
Where work is ongoing on the exterior faces of structures the working platforms that are
used to gain access will be fitted with lightweight mesh or netting to prevent objects falling
from them.
Materials and equipment will not be stored or located within 2m of edges of working areas or
platforms.
10
All materials and waste that may be blown by the wind from raised structures will be secured
and stored in a manner that prevents them from being blown from the structure.
11
Where designated pedestrian walkways, entrances or exits are located beneath edges or
openings where work is ongoing steel framed and sheeted canopies will be erected to
protect pedestrians from falling objects.
12
The contractor will produce a method statement and job hazard analysis for all roof and
canopy work activity. For work on new structures safety information will be obtained from the
designers and incorporated into the method statement and job hazard analysis. For work on
existing structures where design information is not available then a survey of the existing
structure will be made to identify hazards such as:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Fragile coverings
Holes and openings
Exposed edges
Lack of safe access
Damage or disrepair of the existing structure
Adjacent structures, facilities or services
13
A method statement and job hazard analysis will be provided to the Engineer for all roof and
canopy work activity. No work will commence prior to approval of the method statement and
job hazard analysis by the Engineer. All roof and canopy installation workers will be fully
conversant with the construction method, sequence and hazard control measures prior to
any work activity commencing.
14
The contractor will meet the following roof and canopy work specific Occupational Health
and Safety requirements:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
15
The structure that the suspended working platform is attached to or mounted on will be
surveyed and assessed to ensure that it is capable of supporting the loads that the
equipment will impose on it.
16
The installation, maintenance, use and dismantling of suspended working platforms will be under
the control of a competent person that is appointed by the Contractor. The competent person will
be fully familiar with each and every type of suspended working platform in use on the Worksite.
Persons who work from suspended working platforms will have received formal training to
ensure the safety of themselves and of other persons that may be affected by the operation with
particular emphasis on the correct use of the equipment, working at height and falling object
prevention.
QCS 2010
17
Section 1
Part 10
Page 20
The following requirements will be met for all use of suspended working platforms;
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(g)
(h)
(i)
10.3.14 Electrical
1
This specification applies to all temporary electrical systems on the Worksite and all
electrical equipment used for construction, commissioning and testing purposes. The
requirements given are minimum requirements and Contractors are required to equal or
better them.
The Contractor will reduce risk by using cordless tools or electrical equipment that is
operated at reduced voltages. Only intrinsically safe electrical equipment will be permitted for
use at any location where flammable atmospheres may exist or confined space.
All electrical equipment used on the Worksite will be manufactured in accordance with an
internationally recognised standard.
Jointing of all electrical cables and wires shall be by means of proprietary terminations or
connectors. The practice of twisting and taping electrical components together to create a
connection is prohibited.
Temporary power supplies for the Worksite may be provided from generators or via a
Worksite specific transformer connected to the national power network. All generators and
transformers on the Worksite shall be located in areas that are fenced and secured to
prevent any unauthorized entry. Each such location will be provided with portable fire
extinguishers. All electrical systems shall be bonded to the earth.
All electrical circuits that are created will be protected by earth leakage circuit breakers
(ELCB). All metal components of an electrical system shall be earthed. Distribution of
electrical power shall be provided through distribution panels and switches that are enclosed
or housed in securely closed and locked boxes or cabinets.
Warning signs that clearly indicate electrical hazards shall be fixed to all electrical switch
boxes and distribution panels. Similar signs shall be displayed at all transformers, generators
and overhead power line locations.
(f)
Users will not alter or interfere with any part of the suspended working platform, control or
safety devices.
The work area below the suspended working platform will be clearly marked a pedestrian
exclusion zone will be created.
The user will check all controls and safety devices on a daily basis to ensure that they are
functioning correctly.
Use will cease whenever wind speed in excess of the maximum permissible is
anticipated.
The suspended working platform will be maintained in a horizontal position whilst it is in
use.
The practice of transferring people or materials from the suspended working platform is
prohibited other than at the designated access points.
Every person working from a suspended working platform shall wear a full body safety
harness that is attached to an independent lifeline.
The platform will be kept free of loose materials or articles liable to endanger or interfere
with the workers hand hold or foot hold
The power supply will be disabled whenever the suspended working platform is left
unattended.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 21
All signs and notices shall be in English and Arabic and the language preferred (can be
understand) by the workers employed on the Worksite.
10.4
FIRST AID
10.4.1
The Contractor shall provide and maintain first aid Boxes / Clinic (according to number of
workers as per Qatar Law No.14 of the Year 2004 The Labour Law) complete with all first
aid kits and equipment (as a minimum but not limited to Clean room with potable water
supply, Stretcher, Ambulance, Standby Vehicle, ... etc) necessary for the initial care of any of
the Contractors or Engineers personnel who may be injured.
The box shall be kept in a conspicuous place in the establishment and shall be available to
the workers.
The use of the box shall be entrusted to a worker trained in providing first-aid medical
services.
As a minimum, there should be a first aid box with Medical record book in all areas where
work is in progress.
The Contractor shall ensure that the first aid Kits and equipment at each first aid box / clinic
is complete and within expiration date in all respects at all times.
At each first aid box / clinic the names and contact Telephone numbers of the Contractors
staff who are trained to render first aid shall be displayed.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain Periodic medical examinations for workers and
follow up (maximum every year from employment date).
10.5
10.5.1
General
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against fire as required by the insurance
company insuring the Works, the Department of Civil Defence and the Engineer.
Quantities of flammable materials on site shall be kept to an absolute minimum and shall be
properly handled and stored. Any handling and storage recommendations made by Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and the manufacturers of flammable materials shall be strictly
adhered to.
All flammable materials storage areas will be located at least 20m away from other
structures, areas where combustible materials are stored and areas where sources of
ignition are found. Storage areas will be freely ventilated to eliminate any possible build up of
flammable vapour or gas. Flammable material storage facilities will not be constructed of
combustible materials.
Except as otherwise provided herein, the Contractor shall not permit fires to be built or open
type heating devices to be used in any part of the Site.
The Contractor shall provide, regularly checked and maintain approved by Department of
Civil Defence fire fighting equipment in the site offices, the stores and about the Works
where applicable. The type, amount and location of fire fighting equipment shall be to the
requirements of the Department of Civil Defence. The Contractor shall confirm to the
Engineer in writing that the requirements of the Department of Civil Defence have been met.
The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Department of Civil Defence to inspect the
Works and promptly carry out their recommendations at his own expense if requested to do
so by the Engineer.
10
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 22
Combustible fuel oils shall be stored in designated storage areas. Fuel oil shall only be
contained in tanks or containers that are in good condition. Tanks and containers will be
located in bounded areas capable of containing any spillage or leak. Bounded areas will be
kept free of water and debris. All pump equipment and fuel oil lines or hoses will be
maintained regularly to ensure that there no leaking parts. Fuel oil lines and hoses will be
terminated with filler nozzles or valves that stop the flow of fuel oil when the device is not
held. Any electrical equipment such as lighting and pumps that is located in fuel oil storage
areas shall have an operating voltage of 110V or less.
Hot work and welding operations at height require particular controls to prevent people or
materials below being exposed to the risks of the work activity, the following controls will be
put in place;
(d)
(e)
All work activity will be coordinated with other activities in areas below
Areas below will be cleared of all combustible and flammable materials.
Fire blanket / Fire retardant material will be used to cover any combustible materials
that cannot be cleared.
Fire blanket / Fire retardant material must be removed after hot work and welding
activities are completed.
A fire watchman will remain at the site of hot work activity for 30 minutes after work is
finished.
The Contractor will provide training in the correct selection and use of portable fire
extinguishers for every person employed at the Worksite.
10
11
Smoking will be prohibited in any areas where flammable or combustible materials are
stored. It will also be prohibited in any temporary structure other than in clearly designated
and defined smoking areas. Smoking areas will be cleaned on a daily basis, a means of
extinguishing cigarettes will be provided.
12
Fire escape routes, exits and assembly areas will be provided for all enclosed temporary
structures and permanent structures under construction. All such areas will be kept free from
obstructions at all times. Wherever possible in permanent structures under construction the
fire escape routes, exits and assembly areas used will be those designed for use in the
occupied structure.
13
Information and warning signs will be provided at the following locations or areas:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
14
The Contractor shall make all arrangements to keep access for Fire Brigade cleared and
Emergency Alarms audible in all areas.
10.5.2
Emergency Equipment
Temporary fire protection equipment for the Worksite will be provided by the Contractor for
the duration of the contract. Such equipment may include but is not be limited to:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(a)
(b)
(c)
QCS 2010
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
Section 1
Part 10
Page 23
Escape routes, access ways to alarm points, extinguishers, hydrants and other fire fighting
equipment and first aid kits kept clear of obstruction at all times
All structures that are normally occupied by five to twenty five people will be provided with
the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
All temporary facility structures that are normally occupied by twenty five to one hundred
people will be provided with the above plus the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Smoke detectors
One first aid kit for each 25 people.
Designated emergency evacuation routes.
An emergency preparedness and evacuation plan.
An emergency alarm system.
An emergency evacuation drill at periods not exceeding 6 months.
An area set aside for the heating and consumption of food.
All temporary facilities structures that are normally occupied by more than 100 people will be
provided with the above plus the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
All temporary fire protection equipment will be manufactured, inspected, tested and
maintained in accordance with the Department of Civil Defence or internationally recognised
standards.
10.5.3
Hazardous Substances
The Contractor will control the use, handling, transportation and storage of hazardous
substances to reduce the associated health risks. These requirements below are the
minimum that the Contractor will meet to comply with their contractual Occupational Health
and Safety obligations.
Radioactive materials are hazardous substances and any use of such materials on Site will
require a method statement and job hazard analysis to be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to any radioactive material being delivered to the Worksite.
Where any spillage of liquid occurs the contractor will take action to immediately clean the
spillage and remove any contaminated materials from the Worksite.
To effectively control the hazards associated with the use, storage, handling and
transportation of hazardous substances the Contractor will:
(a)
(b)
QCS 2010
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
Section 1
Part 10
Page 24
Make an assessment of the health risks associated with the intended use of each
hazardous substance
Provide the control measures required to reduce the risks identifies to acceptable
levels. Acceptability will be based on internationally recognised best practices and
standards
Train people that use, handle or transport hazardous substances in the associated
risks and control measures
Provide routine health checks for employees that are exposed to hazardous
substances
Provide appropriate spill containment and disposal Spill kit
Toxic/ hazardous substance correctly tagged/ labelled/ signage and secured
Adequate storage provided and Class B fire extinguisher near by
10.6.1
Safety and security procedures shall be implemented as required by the Department of Civil
Defence and the police. These shall be included, as a minimum, warning signs and lights,
adequate barricades, railings, road hump for reduced & control speed and other safeguards
as required by the nature and location of the work being undertaken.
Access to all properties shall be maintained by adequately sign posted diversions, temporary
bridges or other facilities.
A night watchman shall be assigned to ensure that all barricades, lights and other protective
apparatus are maintained during the hours of darkness.
Designated pedestrian routes will be provided throughout the Worksite with firm even
surfaces that are free from distractions. Where such routes traverse level changes they will
be slopped at gradients not exceeding 10% or cut with steps of even height and a tread
width of at least 400mm. Slopes and steps will have anti-slip surfaces. Where the edges of
pedestrian routes are raised more than 1.2m above the surrounding level solid barriers will
be provided at each raised edge to prevent people from falling.
All such equipment shall be routed away from pedestrian access areas. Where such
equipment crosses pedestrian areas it will be located under the pedestrian area or over it at
a height of at least 2.5m above the surface. Where such equipment is routed over a
pedestrian area it will be clearly marked with warning signs.
No electrical cables, hoses or pipes shall be routed along any staircase, ladder access or
across any doorway. This applies to both temporary and permanent works.
Contractor shall provide Client with photocopies of passports, police clearances and any
similar personal security documentation necessary to obtain Client temporary identification
cards and passes for Contractor Personnel to enter Client STP / PTP / premises. Contractor
shall ensure that Contractor Personnel display such identification at all times when they are
on Client STP / PTP / premises.
The Contractor will provide a method statement and job hazard analysis for all demolition
and dismantling activities. Everyone involved in the work needs to know what measures are
to be taken to control the risks and a pre work briefing based on the method statement and
job hazard analysis will be given and recorded by the supervisor. Workers will be closely
supervised to ensure that the control measures required are put into practice. An exclusion
zone will be created around the demolition or dismantling area to prevent persons not
directly involved with the work activity around the work area gaining access. The Contractor
will not allow materials to fall into any area where people are working or passing through.
Protection screens, fences or canopies may be needed to control falling objects.
10.6
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 25
WELFARE OF WORKMEN
10.7.1
All the Contractors personnel shall be provided with safety helmets, eye protection and foot
protection. Safety helmets, eye protection and foot protection shall be worn at all times by all
Contractors personnel on the Site except.
All the Contractors personnel shall be provided with gloves, hearing protection, safety
reflecting vests, dust mask and other protective clothing suitable for the nature of work they
are performing and their working environment (Shorts and sleeveless shirts are prohibited).
The need for other types of PPE will be identified by the contractor as part of their job hazard
analysis or risk assessment process.
The Contractor will display signage detailing the requirements for mandatory PPE throughout
to Worksite. Signage shall be in a format that is easily recognisable to all persons on site
regardless of their preferred language.
10.7.2
Safety Equipment
Construction equipment must only be used in the manner and limitations for which it is
designed, inspected regularly with colour code sticker and Qatar license for driver /
operators must be available.
Adequate hard barricading, temporary bridges, temporary footpaths, lighting, warning tape
and sign posting shall be provided at all excavations.
Adequate bracing and shoring shall be provided at all excavations. 2m spoils clearance from
the excavated pit and sloping shall be maintained (if applicable).
Correctly made ladders must be provided for access into excavations and onto scaffolding
and buildings. Contractors self-made ladders shall not be used.
Scaffolding shall be erected in accordance with the international recognize standard, best
practises and manufacturers recommendations and shall be fitted with toe boards,
guardrails (top & mid rail), proper access, fully boarded platforms, tagging system and hand
railing (refer to 10.3.10).
The following basic safety equipment is required for any works in confined spaces and shall
be supplied by the Contractor:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
The Contractor shall maintain all safety equipment in good working order with up to date
calibration and test certificates where appropriate.
The Contractor shall ensure that any personnel working above 2 m using fall protection devices
with valid 3rd party certificate and to provide them proper training in the selection and use of fall
protection devices.
10.7
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 10
Page 26
10.7.3
The Contractor shall provide, regularly clean and maintain for the duration of the Contract
potable water, washing facilities and sufficient Toilets (with steel exhaust fan) & sanitary
facilities for use by workmen in accommodation areas, at messing facilities and in areas
where work is in progress.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain for the duration of the Contract messing facilities
and a separate designated area for the consumption of food for his staff and labourers.
Cooking and dining facilities that are provided will be operated and maintained in a clean and
hygienic condition. Food preparation and storage areas will be separated from eating areas.
(b)
(c)
No person with any communicable disease will be permitted to work in any kitchen or
dining room
Kitchen workers who have cuts or skin conditions on their hands will not be permitted
to work in any kitchen or dining area
Kitchen workers that handle or serve food will wear latex gloves, hairnets and clean
clothing.
When allowed for in the Project Documentation, the Contractor may provide accommodation
facilities for his staff and labourers at the Site. Such facilities shall be maintained in a proper
manner and to the satisfaction of the appropriate government departments and the Engineer.
Unless otherwise detailed elsewhere in the Project Documentation, the Contractor shall
provide transportation between accommodation and areas of work for his staff and
labourers.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient bins for waste and scrap regularly collected,
segregated and removed from site.
Arrangements for the temporary storage of waste on site shall be made in clearly designated
and defined areas that have fences and signs to clearly indicate the nature of the waste
where combustible wastes are stored portable fire extinguishers will be provided.
Waste collection points will be provided throughout the work areas and will be clearly marked
with signage to indicate the nature of the waste that is to be collected. Waste will be
separated and collected in the following categories:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
Metals
Oils
Concrete & Stone
Tyre & rubber
Glass
General
Food
Sewage
Chemical
Where temporary facilities are created for the storage of materials and equipment such
areas shall be clearly defined and fenced. Notices will be displayed to indicate the nature of
the storage area.
(a)
(b)
(c)
Any hazardous substances that are stored shall only be kept in accordance with the
suppliers recommendations and the requirements of the Hazardous Substances
Specifications.
Flammable materials and fuel oil storage areas must be separated from other
temporary structures or works under construction by a distance of 30m.
Where materials are stored in stacks they will not be stacked to a height of more than
1.5 m where the materials are to be manually handled. Materials for mechanical
handling that are on pallets or contained in bins will not be stacked more that 3 units
high with the base bin or pallet being on firm level ground.
(a)
QCS 2010
(d)
10
Section 1
Part 10
Page 27
Circular materials such as pipes and tubes will be stored in a manner that prevents
item from rolling. They will be placed in a container or frame, or have timber wedges
of an adequate size inserted between the materials and the ground to prevent rolling.
The Contractors will make arrangements to maintain an adequate working environment and
take into account the requirements of this specification to fulfil their contractual obligations
relating to Occupational Health and Safety. Adequate arrangements will be based on
internationally recognised standards.
(a)
(b)
10.7.4
During the period from June 15th until August 31st, work under direct sun rays is prohibited
from 11:30 am to 3:00 pm unless special arrangement is taken by the Contractor to control
and ease effect of the direct sun on the workers. This arrangement should be approved by
the Engineers Representative and should be agreed upon before implementation.
High outdoor temperatures expose persons on the Worksite to the risk of dehydration. The
Contractor will provide shaded rest areas, rest periods and drinking water supplies for all
persons on the Worksite.
Sunlight exposes persons on the Worksite to the risk of skin disorders. Employers will
provide work wear that covers the skin for employees working in direct sunlight. Sunlight
may also cause glare for operators of mobile plant, vehicles, machinery and equipment
which increases the risk of operator errors. The Contractor will provide shaded operating
positions to reduce such risks.
END OF PART
Temporary lighting for all Worksite access areas and roads that will be used
during the hours of darkness.
Task lighting for all work activity at night or in areas with poor visibility.
Emergency lighting for pedestrian access routes in areas of poor visibility and
those used during night time working.
Part 11
Page 1
11.
11.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
11.1.1 Scope
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
11.2.4
General
Type 1 Offices
Type 2 Offices
Car Parking Facilities
11.3
11.3.1
11.3.2
11.3.3
11.3.4
11.3.5
General
Electricity
Water
Telephone
Internet
11.4
11.4.1
11.4.2
11.4.3
11.4.4
11.4.5
11.4.6
11.4.7
General
Computers and Scanners/Printers
Photocopier
Measuring and Recording Equipment
Stationary Supplies
Safety Equipment and Clothing
Telephones and Facsimile Machines
11.5
ATTENDANCE............................................................................................... 7
QCS 2010
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
2
2
3
5
Part 11
Page 2
11.
11.1
GENERAL
11.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for the Engineers temporary site facilities and includes
site offices, utility connections, provision of equipment and supplies and attendance.
11.2
11.2.1
General
The Contractor shall provide site offices the type and number as stated in the Project
Documentation. The position of the site offices shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
Upon removal of the site offices, the area occupied or otherwise affected by them shall be
reinstated to its original condition.
11.2.2
Type 1 Offices
Unless described elsewhere in the Project Documentation the Contractor shall provide,
maintain and remove on completion of the Works the Engineers site offices described in this
Clause.
The Contractor shall proceed with the provision of a site office for the exclusive use of the
Engineer immediately following the award of the Contract and shall provide temporary
alternative accommodation to the Engineers approval until such time as the office is made
available.
The office shall have a minimum area of 20 m2 and shall comply with the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
4
The office shall be provided with the following furniture to the approval of the Engineer:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
1 No. kneehole pattern desk with a total of six lockable drawers, approximately 1500
x 800 x 760 mm in size.
1 No. swivel chair with armrests.
2 No. stacking or folding chairs.
1 No. hanging file or plan chest suitable for AO size prints.
1 No. wastepaper basket.
1 No. two drawer filing cabinet.
1 No. wall mounted pin board, 1000 x 2000 mm in size.
QCS 2010
Part 10
Part 13
Part 11
Page 3
Sanitary and washing facilities shall be provided for the exclusive use of the Engineer and
shall include a WC and a wash-hand basin an adequate supply of hot and cold water shall
be provided at all times.
The Contractor shall insure the site offices against fire, burglary and other risks.
The Contractor shall keep on site at all times an adequate supply of clean, fresh, chilled
drinking water for the consumption of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall maintain the offices in a clean and sanitary condition.
11.2.3
Type 2 Offices
The Engineers site offices described in this Clause shall be provided in lieu of Type 1
Offices only where it is a stated requirement of the Project Documentation.
The offices shall be portable units, mounted on skids or similar and where directed in the
Project Documentation shall become the property of the Government on completion of the
Contract. On completion of the Contract, the offices which are to become the property of the
Government shall be repaired and redecorated to the satisfaction of the Engineer; they shall
then delivered to a location designated by the Engineer within 50 km of the Site.
The buildings shall conform to the general configuration shown below. The number of each
type of unit shall be as stated in the Project Documentation.
The Contractor shall proceed with the provision of the portable offices, which shall be for the
exclusive use of the Engineer immediately following the award of the Contract and shall
provide temporary alternative accommodation to the Engineers approval until such time as
the offices are made available.
QCS 2010
Part 11
Page 4
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a comprehensive specification and
drawings showing the accommodation proposed complete with furnishings, equipment and
fittings before placing any orders.
The units shall be mounted on adequate concrete foundations and shall be provided with
concrete access steps where necessary.
The units may be constructed of composite timber framed panels with wood or metal
cladding, any combination of these, or alternative forms or construction which comply with
the following levels of performance:
Thermal conductance - 0.60 w/m2 C
Fire resistance
- hour
Roof
Roof coverings shall be selected for durability, freedom from excessive maintenance, and
the ability to withstand extreme exposure to sun, heat and humidity.
The units shall be finished internally and externally with low maintenance materials.
10
The offices shall be air-conditioned with wall mounted units to maintain each room at a
maximum steady dry bulb temperature of 25C at a relative humidity of 50% under the
expected climatic conditions expected at the Site. Extract fans capable of 10 air changes
per hour shall be provided in the kitchen and toilets.
11
The installation and testing of wiring and electrical equipment in the units shall be in
accordance with the latest requirements of the Qatar General Electricity & Water
Corporation.
12
Each office shall be provided with the following furniture to the approval of the Engineer:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
13
Each toilet shall be provided with the following sanitary fittings to the approval of the
Engineer and an adequate supply of hot and cold water at all times:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
14
1 No. kneehole pattern desk with a total of six lockable drawers and
approximately 1500 x 800 x 760 mm in size.
1 No. swivel chair with armrests.
No. stacking or folding chairs.
1 No. hanging file or plan chest suitable for AO size prints.
1 No. wastepaper basket.
1 No. two drawer filing cabinet.
1 No. wall mounted pin board, 1000 x 2000 mm in size.
The samples and meeting room shall be provided with the following furniture to the approval
of the Engineer:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
QCS 2010
Walls
Part 11
Page 5
15
All furniture and equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed
following completion of the Works unless otherwise noted in the Project Documentation.
16
The kitchen shall be provided with the following equipment to the approval of the Engineer:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
1 No. stainless steel single bowl single drainer sink with hot and cold water and
cupboards underneath.
1 No. floor mounted two door cupboard to match sink.
1 No. refrigerator with a capacity of 200 litres.
1 No. three pint kettle and sufficient crockery and cutlery.
The Contractor shall insure the site offices against fire, burglary and other risks.
18
The Contractor shall keep on site at all times an adequate supply of clean, fresh, chilled
drinking water for the consumption of the Engineer.
19
The Contractor shall maintain the Offices in a clean and sanitary condition.
11.2.4
Parking areas shall be paved or have a finished surface as approved by the Engineer and
shall be covered with a suitable canopy to provide shading.
The number of shaded car parking spaces required shall be 2 No. for Type 1 Offices and 6
No. for Type 2 Offices unless otherwise stated in the Project Documentation.
11.3
UTILITY CONNECTIONS
11.3.1
General
The Contractor shall make all arrangements and pay all charges in connection with the
installation, maintenance, operation and removal of the service utilities described in this
Clause.
11.3.2
Electricity
The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of an uninterrupted electrical power supply to
the Engineers offices during all working hours and any at other time as requested by the
Engineer for the duration of the Contract.
11.3.3
Water
The Contractor shall arranged for the provision of an uninterrupted water supply to the
Engineers offices during all working hours and at any other time as requested by the
Engineer for the duration of the Contract.
11.3.4
Telephone
The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of two (2) land lines for the sole use of the
Engineer for Type 1 Offices and three (3) land lines for the sole use of the Engineer for Type
2 Offices.
The Contractor may recover the net cost of international calls made by the Engineer.
11.3.5
Internet
The Contractor shall arranged for the provision of a dedicated and uninterrupted internet
access to the Engineers offices during all working hours and at any other time as requested
by the Engineer for the duration of the Contract. The speed of such supply shall be agreed
with the Engineer..
QCS 2010
17
Part 11
Page 6
11.4.1
General
The following items of equipment, supplies and associated level of service shall all be
provided unless detailed elsewhere in the Contract Documentation.
11.4.2
The Contractor shall provide new network/internet capable computers and scanners/printers
for the sole use of the Engineer. The number of computers and scanners/printers required
and their performance specification shall be as detailed in the Project Documentation. The
Contractor shall also supply and install any computer software as detailed in the Project
Documentation.
The Contractor shall maintain the computers and scanners/printer for the duration of the
Contract and provide all consumables necessary for its operation.
The Contractor shall be responsible for installing legal copies of operating system and
software, trouble shooting, supplying of required consumables and maintenance of the
system.
Operating system and software requirements shall be as specified by the Engineer, with the
following as a minimum:
(a)
(b)
All software must be of latest version and Arabic enabled, to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure that all computers and scanners/printers provided for the
Engineers use are networked within the Engineers facilities to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
11.4.3
Photocopier
The Contractor shall provide a new photocopier for the sole use of the Engineer. The
performance specification for the photocopier shall be as detailed in the Project
Documentation.
The Contractor shall maintain the photocopier for the duration of the Contract and provide all
consumables necessary for its operation.
11.4.4
The Contractor shall provide measuring and recording equipment for the sole use of the
Engineer. The following items, which shall be to the approval of the Engineer, shall be
provided for the duration of the Contract:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
QCS 2010
11.4
Part 11
Page 7
Other equipment such as pegs, tools, etc, which are necessary for the checking of the
Works shall be provided as requested by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall maintain and replace as necessary the equipment for the duration of
the Contract. Surveying instruments shall be new or in as good as new condition, of an
approved make with a current certificate of adjustment.
11.4.5
Stationary Supplies
The Contractor shall supply stationary for the Engineer for the duration of the Contract.
Stationary items shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
11.4.6
The Contractor shall supply safety equipment and clothing for the Engineer and his staff.
Safety equipment and clothing shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Safety helmets, boots, gloves, High visibility vests, safety glasses (Clear and tinted)
Safety belts and harnesses.
Boiler suits.
Any other PPE identified by the Contractors job hazard analysis or risk assessment
process
The Contractor shall also supply gas detection equipment and breathing apparatus in
accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 10 of this Section, Occupational Health and
Safety.
11.4.7
For Type 1 Offices, the Contractor shall supply and install a telephone and facsimile
machine. The telephone and facsimile machine should conform to the relevant provisions of
any Q-TEL standard or requirement.
For Type 2 Offices, the Contractor shall supply and install a telephone in each office and the
meeting room. Each telephone shall be connected to a private address box exchange
(PABX) system. The Contractor shall also supply and install a facsimile machine. The
telephones, PABX system and facsimile shall conform to the relevant provisions of any QTEL standard or requirement.
11.5
ATTENDANCE
11.5.1
The Contractor shall provide every assistance to the Engineer in carrying out his duties.
The Contractor shall provide for the use of the Engineers Representative and his staff, any
chainman/assistants to carry out any duties whatsoever, as required by the Engineers
Representative.
QCS 2010
Part 11
Page 8
11.5.2
Contract Administration
The Contractor shall provide secretaries, cleaners and tea persons for the exclusive use of
the Engineer for the duration of the Contract.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
Part 12
Page 1
12.
12.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
12.1.1 Scope
12.1.2 Related Parts and Sections
2
2
12.2.1
12.2.2
12.2.3
12.2.4
12.2.5
Buildings
Site Fabrication Areas
Materials Storage Area
Power, Water, Lighting and Heating
Miscellaneous
12.3
2
2
2
3
3
3
ADVERTISING............................................................................................... 3
12.4.1 Photographs
12.4.2 Name Boards and Other Advertising
QCS 2010
3
3
12.2
Part 12
12.
12.1
GENERAL
12.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for the Contractors temporary site facilities.
12.1.2
12.2
12.2.1
Buildings
The Contractor shall provide all offices, sheds, stores and other buildings necessary for him
to undertake all duties, obligations and activities associated with the construction of the
Works.
All buildings shall be supplied and maintained in good condition and shall be of neat
appearance.
The position of all the Contractors temporary site buildings shall be to the approval of the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall maintain an office at the Site for the duration of the Contract. This office
shall be open at all times during Site working hours.
Upon completion of the Contract, all temporary site buildings shall be removed and the area
occupied or otherwise affected by them reinstated to its original condition.
The Government of Qatar will grant a right of access only within the road reservation. Should
the Contractor need to use adjacent areas of land for camps, plant site etc, he shall arrange
for the right to use the said land himself.
This clause in no way invalidates the obligations under Clause 33 of the General Conditions
of Contract.
12.2.2
The Contractor shall provide an area suitable for assembly and fabrication purposes.
Fabrication areas shall simulate factory conditions if required in the Project Documentation.
12.2.3
The Contractor shall provide sufficient and appropriate materials storage areas. The storage
areas shall be suitable for the materials to be stored in them and shall offer necessary
protection where required.
The Contractor shall ensure that the storage areas comply with the relevant provisions of
Part 9 of this Section, Materials.
QCS 2010
This Section
Page 2
Part 12
Page 3
The Contractor shall provide, maintain and subsequently remove temporary services for
power supply, water supply, lighting and heating.
All electrical installations shall be in the charge of a competent person who shall accept full
responsibility for its use and any alterations or additions thereto. The name, designation and
telephone number of such person shall be prominently displayed close to the main switch or
circuit breaker of the installation, and also in the Contractors site office.
Site work power tool supplies (except for operation of pumps) shall be of 110 volts (55 volts
to earth). All electricity supply cables shall be buried or properly supported and protected
and shall be armoured. Flexible cable shall only be allowed for hand lamps and hand held
tools and shall not exceed 6 metres in length. Industrial type plugs and sockets shall be
used.
All site electrical installations shall comply with the requirements of the current regulations of
QGEWC.
12.2.5
Miscellaneous
The Contractor shall provide, maintain and subsequently remove temporary roads, paths,
parking areas and refuse disposal areas. The area occupied by temporary roads, paths,
parking areas and refuse disposal areas or otherwise affected by them shall be restored to
their original condition on completion of the Contract.
12.3
12.3.1
Standard Signboard: The Contractor shall provide and erect a temporary signboard at the
location of his approved site compound. In addition he shall provide signboards at the start
and end of each ongoing work location for all works whether major or minor.
The Project sign boards shall comply with the standard details, as updated by the project
drawings and specifications, and shall be to the approval of the Engineer. In addition, the
Contractor shall obtain all necessary approvals from the relevant authorities prior to erection.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the structural stability of the signboards but shall
submit details of his proposals for support to the Engineer for approval.
The Contractor shall maintain, move and adapt the signboards as required during the
progress of the Works and shall remove them upon completion.
12.4
ADVERTISING
12.4.1
Photographs
The Contractor shall not use photographs or any details of his work in connection with the
Contract in any form of publicity or advertisement in any part of the world without having first
obtained the Engineers approval to its content and context.
12.4.2
Details of any further sign boards other than as designed in Clause 12.3.1 or advertisements
that the Contractor may wish to erect on site shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
QCS 2010
12.2.4
Part 12
Page 4
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 13
Page 1
13.
13.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
13.1.1 Scope
13.2
SETTING OUT............................................................................................... 3
QCS 2010
3
4
2
3
SURVEYING.................................................................................................. 3
2
2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 13
Page 2
13.1
GENERAL
13.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for setting out of the Works and includes locating
existing services, surveying the Site and establishment of temporary bench marks.
The Engineer reserves the right to order levels to be taken at any time considered
necessary for the full and proper supervision and measurement of the Works.
Part 11
13.2
13.2.1
Site Information
Before commencing the setting out of the Works the Contractor shall ascertain the location
of all existing underground services within the Site boundary. The Contractor shall prepare
a plan detailing the location of the services.
Any conflict between existing services and any part of the proposed Works shall be brought
to the attention to the Engineer without delay.
Any re-work resulting from the Contractors failure to locate and identify services shall be
undertaken at the Contractors cost.
13.2.2
Site Inspection
Before commencing the setting out of the Works, the Contractor and the Engineer shall
make an inspection of the Site.
Where appropriate, the Engineer shall require the Contractor to arrange for surveys to be
undertaken, in conjunction with the owners or occupiers, of the condition of roads,
properties, lands and crops which may be affected by the Works. Before any work
affecting such roads, properties, lands or crops is commenced, the Contractor shall confirm
in writing to the Engineer that the relevant survey is a true and accurate record of their
condition.
13.3
13.3.1
The Contractor shall establish accurate temporary bench marks on permanent blocks from
which the levels to which the Works are to be constructed may be transferred. The location
of temporary bench marks shall be agreed with the Engineer. The level of temporary bench
marks shall be related to the Qatar National Height Datum. An existing bench mark or
control station related to the Qatar National Height Datum will be indicated by the Engineer
for this purpose.
The Contractor shall prepare a plan detailing the location of the bench marks and
temporary bench marks and keep it up to date for the duration of the Contract.
QCS 2010
13.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 13
Page 3
The Contractor shall protect and maintain the temporary bench marks until the Works are
complete. Upon completion of the Works the Contractor shall clear away the temporary
bench marks to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor is responsible for checking the accuracy of temporary bench mark. Any rework resulting from incorrect or inaccurate temporary bench marks shall be undertaken at
the Contractors cost.
13.3.2
Site Grid
The grid shall be tied to the Qatar National Grid. An existing control station related to the
Qatar National grid will be indicated by the Engineer for this purpose.
13.4
SURVEYING
13.4.1
Site Survey
Before the Works or any part thereof are commenced, the Contractor and the Engineer shall
together make a complete survey and take levels of the Site and agree all particulars upon
which setting out of the Works shall be based, including existing plant, buildings and
services.
The Contractor shall prepare drawings detailing all survey information and levels. Such
levels shall be related to the temporary bench marks as aforesaid. The Plans shall also
show the Site Grid. After agreement of the drawings they shall be signed by the Engineer
and Contractor and shall form basis of settling out of the Works.
The Contractor shall submit the original signed Drawings with three copies to the Engineer.
Failing such surveys and agreements being prepared and/or signed by the Contractor, the
surveys of the Engineer shall be final and binding upon both parties.
13.5
SETTING OUT
13.5.1
The Contractor shall carry out at his own cost the setting out of the Works.
True and proper settings out of the Works in relation to reference data given
in the Project Documentation.
Accurately setting out the positions, levels and dimensions of all parts of the Works.
Any delay or loss resulting from errors in the setting out of the Works shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Setting out shall be reviewed by the Engineer before
commencing the Works, but such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for the correct execution of the Work.
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 13
Page 4
The Contractor shall provide measuring and recording equipment for the Engineer in
accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 11 of this Section, Engineers Site Facilities.
The Contractor shall maintain all measuring and recording equipment in good working
order at all times.
The Contractor shall provide all assistance which the Engineer may require for checking
the setting out and taking measurements of the Works, including labour, equipment and
transportation.
13.5.2
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing fourteen (14) days in advance of his
intention to set out any of part of the Works that lies in private land.
The Contractor shall ensure that all requirements and instructions of private land owners
are strictly adhered to.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 14
Page 1
14.
14.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
14.1.1 Scope
14.2
TEMPORARY WORKS.................................................................................. 2
14.2.1 General
14.3
14.3.1 General
14.4.1 General
QCS 2010
14.4
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 14
Page 2
14.1
GENERAL
14.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for Temporary Works required in connection with
construction of the Works and temporary plant and equipment required in connection with
aiding the construction of the Works. It does not include overpumping activities in respect of
sewers and drains.
Occupational Health and Safety concerning temporary works and equipment is covered in
Section 11 Health and Safety
14.2
TEMPORARY WORKS
14.2.1
General
Everything used for and in connection with the Temporary Works shall be fit for the purpose,
in serviceable condition and in compliance with any relevant standard.
The Contractor shall design his Temporary Works to be of adequate strength, stability and
suitability.
The Contractor shall submit details of any Temporary Works proposed to the Engineer for
review before commencing the work. Such details shall include, but not be limited to design
calculations and drawings. The submission to the Engineer of any such details shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for sufficiency of the Temporary Works or of his
other duties and responsibilities under the Contract.
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that Temporary Works are not in any way
detrimental to existing structures in any way. Particular care shall be taken with scaffolding
to avoid staining or mechanical damage to finishing.
The Contractor shall make safe and reinstate all areas affected by Temporary Works.
14.3
TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT
14.3.1
General
The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good condition on the Site all plant, tools and
vehicles necessary for the proper and safe execution of the Works.
Temporary equipment shall be fit for the purpose for which it is to be used.
Temporary equipment shall only be operated by personnel who are trained and qualified.
QCS 2010
14.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 14
Page 3
14.4.1
General
Cranes, whether used to construct the Works or provided as part of the permanent Works,
must have a current test certificate.
Each sling, shackle or other item of loose lifting tackle, whether used to construct the Works
or provided as part of the permanent Works, must have either a current manufacturer's test
certificate or a current test certificate.
Test certificates must be issued by a competent testing authority approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor must have a copy of each test certificate on site available for inspection by
the Engineer.
The following Standards and Code of Practice shall be complied with and where such
documents are replaced or superseded the Contractor shall comply with the latest version:
(a)
Mobile and Tower Cranes: BS 1757, BS 2799 and CP 3010.
(b)
Overhead Cranes: BS 466 and BS 5744.
(c)
Slings: BS 1290, BS EN 1492, ISO 4309 / 3481 Pt 2, ASME B30.9.
(d)
Chain Blocks: BS 3243.
(e)
Shackles: Alloy: BS 3551/ BS 6994.
(f)
Chain: BS 4942 part 1 & 6.
(g)
Hooks: BS 2903, ASME B30.10.
(h)
Ring and link: BS 2902.
QCS 2010
14.4
Part 15
Temporary Controls
Page 1
15.
15.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
15.1.1 Scope
15.2.1
15.2.2
15.2.3
15.2.4
15.2.5
15.2.6
15.2.7
Construction Cleaning
Dust Control
Noise
Nuisance and Trespass
Pollution Control
Surface Water and Groundwater Control
Environmental protection
QCS 2010
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
15.2
Part 15
Temporary Controls
Page 2
15.
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
15.1
GENERAL
15.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the Contractors responsibilities with respect to temporary controls
needed to protect the Works and the environment.
Part 5
Interference
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
15.2.1
Construction Cleaning
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper upkeep and maintenance of the Site and
Works and shall remove from the Site all rubbish and other waste as it accumulates.
Materials and equipment shall be positioned, stored and stacked in an orderly manner.
Properly constructed rubbish chutes shall be used for clearing the debris from upper floors.
Debris shall be accumulated in suitable pre-determined areas and removed from the Site as
often as is practical.
On completion of the Works, any protective tape and other temporary coverings shall be
removed and the internal and external surface of the structure shall be thoroughly cleaned to
completely remove all dust, dirt, stains, handmarks, paint spots, plaster, mortar droppings
and other blemishes.
15.2.2
Dust Control
The Contractor shall conduct his operations and activities in such a manner that no
operation shall be included which will emit into the atmosphere any flying dust or dirt which
might constitute a nuisance.
15.2.3
Noise
The Contractor shall restrict the use of plant, machinery, equipment and work practises likely
to produce unacceptable noise levels to normal working hours.
15.2.4
All reasonable means shall be used to avoid inconveniencing owners and occupiers of
adjacent properties. All plant, machinery or equipment shall be placed and used on the Site
so as to avoid any nuisance or trespass on adjoining property.
Should it be necessary for any plant, machinery or equipment to project or operate over
adjoining property, the Contractor shall obtain the permission of the adjoining owner or
occupier. Details of approvals shall be submitted to the Engineer in writing.
No workmen employed on the Works shall be allowed to trespass upon adjoining properties.
If in the execution of the Works it is necessary for the Contractor to enter adjacent
properties, he shall firstly obtain the permission of the owners of the property. The Contractor
shall ensure that any instructions made by the owners of the properties are strictly adhered
to.
QCS 2010
15.2
Part 15
Temporary Controls
Page 3
The Contractor shall be held responsible for and shall indemnify the Employer against all
claims, which may arise out of his failure to comply with provisions of items 1. 2. 3 and 4 of
Clause 1.15.2.4
15.2.5
Pollution Control
The Contractor shall ensure that none of his operations or work practises result in the
polluting of the air, underground strata or any existing watercourse, canal, lake, reservoir
borehole and aquifer.
The Contractor shall rectify any problem resulting from pollution caused by the Contractor to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
15.2.6
The Contractor shall keep the Work well drained until the Engineer certifies that the whole of
the Works is substantially complete and shall ensure that so far as is practicable all work is
carried out in the dry. Excavated areas shall be kept well drained and free from standing
water.
The Contractor shall construct, operate and maintain all temporary dams, water courses and
other works of all kinds including pumping and well-point dewatering that may be necessary
to exclude water from the Works while construction is in progress. Such temporary works
shall not be removed without the approval of the Engineer.
Notwithstanding any approval by the Engineer of the Contractors arrangements for the
exclusion of water, the Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency thereof and for
keeping the Works safe at all times, particularly during periods of rainfall that may result in
flooding. Any damage to the Works arising through the Contractors failure to provide
sufficient protection against water, including flooding, shall be made good at his own
expense.
The Contractor is to take all necessary precautions to avoid floatation of any structure.
The Contractor shall ensure that his groundwater control activities do not adversely affect
any existing structure or service.
15.2.7
Environmental protection
The Contractor shall comply with all conditions of the environmental clearance issued for the
project by the Supreme Council for the Environment and Natural Reserves.
The Contractor shall comply with all rules and regulations regarding environmental
protection and pollution control issued by the Supreme Council for the Environment and
Natural Reserves.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 16
Traffic Diversions
Page 1
16.
TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS................................................................................. 2
16.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
16.1.1
16.1.2
16.1.3
16.1.4
16.1.5
Scope
Conformance
Safety
System Description
Traffic Police Requirements
16.2
QCS 2010
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 16
Traffic Diversions
Page 2
TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS
16.1
GENERAL
16.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies requirements associated with traffic diversions. Traffic diversions include
for work in, or affecting the use of, roads, footpaths and right of ways and may comprise the
construction and maintenance of paved and unpaved detour carriageways including all
earthworks and the provision of adequate drainage, lighting, sign posting, street furniture and
traffic control devices.
Part 4
Protection
16.1.2
Conformance
Signs, control and control devices associated with traffic diversions shall conform to the
relevant provisions of Traffic Control at Roadworks produced by the Ministry of Public
Works and shall be to the approval of the Traffic Police and the Public Works Authority.
16.1.3
Safety
The Contractor is responsible for all safety issues associated with the installation, operation,
maintenance and removal of traffic diversions.
The Contractor shall provide lighting in accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 4 of
this Section, Protection.
16.1.4
System Description
Where the diversion of any existing road, footpath or public right or way is temporarily
necessitated by the Works, the Contractor shall provide and maintain an alternative which
shall be operational before interference with the existing facility.
Temporary traffic control devices as well as any other traffic management requirement shall
be erected and maintained by the Contractor for the duration of any activity in, or affecting
the use of, roads, footpaths and right of ways.
16.1.5
Before any work in, or affecting the use of, any road, footpath, and right of way is
commenced, the Contractors proposed method of working shall be agreed with, and
confirmed in writing to, the Engineer and the Traffic Police.
Throughout the execution of the Works and the maintenance period, the Contractor shall cooperate with the Traffic Police concerning works in, or access to, roads, footpaths and right
of ways. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any requirements of, or arrangements
made with, the Traffic Police.
16.2
16.2.1
General Requirements
The Contractor shall prepare detailed plans showing any proposed traffic diversions. The
plans shall fully detail the diversion in all respects and shall include construction details if
necessary. The plans shall show the position of ramps, traffic signs, cones, barriers,
demarcation posts and tape, flashing lights and any other traffic control devices. The plans
QCS 2010
16.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 16
Traffic Diversions
Page 3
shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and shall be approved by the Traffic Police.
Traffic diversion apparatus shall not be erected until the Traffic Police have reviewed and
approved the traffic diversion plans.
Persons acting as flagmen shall be physically and mentally qualified, trained in their duties
and courteous. Each flagman on duty shall be identified with appropriate and distinctive
apparel approved by the Engineer and equipped with bilingual STOP/GO signs. Reflective
apparel is required for flagging duties during darkness.
Where paved carriageways, unpaved carriageways or ramps are required, they shall be
provided and maintained to a standard suitable in all respects for the class or classes of
traffic or pedestrians requiring the use of them.
On completion, all traffic diversion works and apparatus shall be removed and land affected
by them reinstated to its original condition.
16.2.2
The Contractor shall allow for the construction of temporary diversions to permit all existing
traffic movements for the duration of the Contract period.
All diversions shall be constructed in accordance with the Qatar Traffic Manual Traffic
Control at Roadworks booklet and the Qatar Highway Design Manual, and shall be
approved prior to the implementation by both the Engineer and Traffic Police. It is the
Contractors responsibility to ensure that any traffic diversion required is properly signed,
demarcated, illuminated, controlled and maintained at all times.
Upon the Engineers request, the Contractor shall install and commission temporary traffic
signals capable of handling the diverted traffic.
Sequential arrow boards operating on a 24-hour basis (engine or solar powered) must be
used at all diversion points.
Within the limits of the project where pedestrian traffic is present, all excavated areas,
regardless of depth, must be cordoned off by means of wired mesh panels of height no less
than 1.8m connected together to form a continuous barrier wall.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 17
Project Co-ordination
Page 1
17.
17.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
17.1.1 Scope
17.1.2 Responsibility
2
2
CO-ORDINATION.......................................................................................... 2
17.2.1
17.2.2
17.2.3
17.2.4
17.2.5
Contractors Activities
Sub-Contractors
Other Contractors
Other Ministries
Liaison with the Public Utility Authorities and other Contractors
QCS 2010
2
2
2
3
3
17.2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 17
Project Co-ordination
Page 2
17.
PROJECT CO-ORDINATION
17.1
GENERAL
17.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the co-ordination activities for which the Contractor is responsible.
Part 18
Part 19
Other Contractors
Regulatory Requirements
Responsibility
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper co-ordination of all his activities
associated with the construction of the Works including that required between the Engineer,
utility owners, government departments, sub-contractors and other contractors.
No major operations shall be commenced or work outside the usual working hours be
carried out without the consent in writing of the Engineer.
17.2
CO-ORDINATION
17.2.1
Contractors Activities
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
17.2.2
Sub-Contractors
The Contractor is responsible for co-ordinating the work of his sub-contractors in all
respects.
17.2.3
Other Contractors
The Contractor shall co-ordinate his work as necessary with other contractors in
accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 18, Other Contractors, of this Section.
QCS 2010
17.1.2
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 17
Project Co-ordination
Page 3
17.2.4
Other Ministries
The Contractor shall co-ordinate his work as necessary with other Ministries in accordance
with the relevant provisions of Part 19, Regulatory Requirements, of this Section.
17.2.5
The Contractor shall liaise with all public utility authorities for water, electricity, telephones,
etc and shall:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(e)
(f)
(g)
The Contractor shall make due allowance for carrying out the works, whilst public utility
authorities are working on the Site, during the Contract period. This due allowance shall
include programming of the works to suit the programmes of the public utility authorities.
The Contractor shall at all times be responsible for the compliance with these requirements
of his sub-contractors.
Before final surfacing of any carriageways or footways takes place, the Contractor is
responsible for ascertaining from all public utility authorities that their underground works
have been completed. In the event that the Contractor failing to carry out this obligation to
the satisfaction of the Engineer and completed surfacing is subsequently disturbed, the
Engineer may instruct the Contractor to carry out work at his own expense.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
(d)
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 18
Other Contractors
Page 1
18.
OTHER CONTRACTORS.............................................................................. 2
18.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
18.1.1 Scope
18.2
QCS 2010
18.4
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 18
Other Contractors
Page 2
OTHER CONTRACTORS
18.1
GENERAL
18.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for access to the Site for other contractors, for
co-operation and co-ordination with other contractors and for the provision of facilities with
other contractors.
18.2
18.2.1
Unhindered Access
The Contractor shall allow other contractors unhindered access to any part of the Works
when in the opinion of the Engineer those parts are sufficiently completed.
18.3
18.3.1
The Contractor shall carry out his work in a manner that causes the minimum amount of
interference to other contractors working on the Site.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate his operations with the activities of other contractors where
necessary in order to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the Works.
Those works associated with existing or future service installation shall only be carried out by
a contractor or sub-contractor approved by the public utility authority concerned. The
Engineer shall require proof of such approval in writing prior to the commencement of works.
18.4
18.4.1
If specified in the Project Documentation, the Contractor shall provide site facilities for other
contractors.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
18.
QCS 20
010
Secttion 1
Part
P 19
Regulatorry Requirements
Page 1
19.
REGULA
ATORY REQUIREME
ENTS ....................................... ......................... 2
19.1
GENERA
AL ............................. ................................................ ......................... 2
19.1.1 Scope
19.1.2 Referencce
19.1.3 Contracto
ors Respo
onsibility
19.2
NOTICES
S .............................. ................................................ ......................... 3
19.2.1 General
19.2.2 Notice of Intent
MISCELL
LANEOUS ............... ................................................ ......................... 3
3
3
3
3
19.4.1 Scope
QCS 2010
19.3
2
2
2
QCS 20
010
Secttion 1
Part
P 19
Regulatorry Requirements
Page 2
19.
REGUL
LATORY REQUIRE
R
EMENTS
S
19.1
GENERA
AL
19.1.1
Scope
Related Se
ections and Parts
P
are as ffollows:
This Sectio
on
19.1.2
Partt 16
Partt 17
Traffic Diverrsions
Project Co-o
ordination
Reference
Code on Barrier-Free
Accessibilityy in Buildings, 2002 (verr 1.0), Buildiing and Con
B
nstruction
Authority, Singapore
S
Universal Design
D
Guide
elines, 2006, Building and
d Constructio
on Authority,, Singapore
19.1.3
Contractorrs Respons
sibility
The Contra
actor shall lo
ocate by exca
avating hand
d dug trial ho
oles and ma rk with suitable posts
all the Departments un
nderground sservices within the Site an
nd shall ensuure that such
h markers
are mainta
ained in the correct posiition at all times. The Contractor
C
shhall advise the public
utility autho
orities of any
y installation not found wh
here shown on the drawiings, or foun
nd but not
QCS 2010
QCS 20
010
Secttion 1
Part
P 19
Regulatorry Requirements
Page 3
shown or fo
ound damag
ged or subse
equently dam
maged. The Engineer shhall be notifie
ed clearly
of any such
h findings.
The Contra
actor shall be
e responsible
e for the cos
st of any repair work neccessitated by
y damage
caused by him to any of
o the Departm
ments facilitties or losses
s arising from
m their disrup
ption.
Copies of all
a informatio
on obtained fform each Department shall be subm
mitted to the Engineer
and kept on
n the Site at all times.
19.2
NOTICES
S
19.2.1
General
19.2.2
Notice of Intent
The Contra
actor shall give
g
at least seven days
s notice to th
he Departmeent of the date upon
which it is intended
i
to operate
o
plantt or equipme
ent or carry out
o any workk for which pe
ermission
has been given
g
in writing by the D
Department: such
s
operations or work shall only be
b carried
out in the presence
p
a re
epresentative
e of the Depa
artment unle
ess written coonfirmation shall
s
have
been obtain
ned that this unnecessary
ry.
19.3
MISCELL
LANEOUS
S
19.3.1
Work requ
uired to be carried
c
out b
by the Deparrtment
If the Depa
artment requires work to be carried out
o on its ins
stallations duuring the exe
ecution of
the Works, the Contra
actor shall provide all facilities to the Departtments conttractor or
workmen. The Contra
actor shall cco-ordinate the work of the Deparrtment and his own
activities, and
a when ne
ecessary sha
all amend his programm
me to suit thee requiremen
nts of the
Departmen
nt and shall keep
k
the Eng
gineer informed of all arra
angements m
made.
19.3.2
Regulation
ns of Road Openings
O
19.4
19.4.1
Scope
Types of buildings
Accessiblee areas
Residential buildings:
(a) 3--storeys and below
Office buildings
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by
employees
s or public.
Shophousses
The ground
d floor for noon-residential use
shall be ac
ccessible to eemployees or
public.
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by
employees
s or public.
QCS 2010
QCS 20
010
Secttion 1
No
Part
P 19
Regulatorry Requirements
Types of buildings
Accessiblee areas
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by
employees
s or public.
Religious buildings an
nd Mosques
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by
worshipperrs or public.
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by
employees
s or public.
Cinemas, theatres, co
oncert halls, sstadia or
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by
other placces of public resort where
e permanentt employees
s or public.
seating arrrangement is
i provided
Schools, colleges,
c
uniiversities or iinstitutions
of learning
g
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by
employees
s or public.
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by sta
aff,
students orr public.
11
1 Sports co
omplexes and
d public swim
mming pools All areas in
ntended for ppublic access
s.
12
2 Restauran
nts and eatin
ng establishm
ments
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by
employees
s or public.
13
3 Markets and
a hawker or
o food centre
res
All areas in
ntended for ppublic access
s.
14
4 Hospitals, clinics, disp
pensaries, nu
ursing
homes, ho
omes for the
e aged and w
welfare
homes
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by sta
aff,
patients, in
nmates or puublic.
15
5 Factories, workshops and industria
al buildings
4-storeys and above
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by
employees
s or public.
16
6 Transportt stations, intterchanges, p
passenger
terminals and adminis
stration build ings in
depots
All areas in
ntended for aaccess by
employees
s or public.
17
7 Vehicle pa
arks (surface
e parking or vvehicle
parking buildings)
Prescribed areas.
Universal Design
D
is a continuous process of innovation
i
ta
argeted at im
mproving usability for
everyone. It is also kno
own that Uniiversal Desig
gn is the des
sign of produucts and env
vironment
to be usablle by all people, to the grreatest exten
nt possible, without
w
the nneed for adaptation or
specialised
d design. It is
s highly recom
mmended that the Owner shall adoptt Universal Design.
D
E
END OF PAR
RT
QCS 2010
10
0 Hostels, halls
h
of residence or dorm
mitories
Page 4
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 20
Page 1
20.
20.1
GENERAL...................................................................................................... 2
20.1.1 Scope
20.2
20.2.1
20.2.2
20.2.3
20.2.4
General
Internal and External Surfaces
The Site
Miscellaneous
2
2
2
3
Qatar Project Management
QCS 2010
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 20
Page 2
CLEARANCE OF SITE
20.1
GENERAL
20.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements for the final clearance of the Site.
20.2
FINAL CLEARING
20.2.1
General
All waste materials shall be removed from the Site and disposed of properly.
20.2.2
The Contractor shall clean all interior and external surfaces exposed to view. The Contractor
shall undertake the following to the satisfaction of the Engineer:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
20.2.3
The Site
The Contractor shall clean the Site and shall undertake the following to the satisfaction of the
Engineer:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
The Contractor shall abide by the latest regulations of the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and
Agriculture and relevant municipalities in clearance of construction works refuse.
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall undertake to carry out the following within a maximum period of
30 days after completion of the agreed building or project and preparing it for use or
stoppage of work for an indefinite period.
(i)
Removal of the entire Contractors equipment, machinery and other belongings
from the work site.
(ii)
Clearance of all earth, debris and refuse whatsoever and transporting them to
the location designated by the concerned municipality, delivering the building or
project absolutely clean and free of any such materials and delivery of the
surrounding area levelled to the natural level of the street pavement.
In the case of Contractors delay or refusal to carry out such a job, he shall have to
pay a penal compensation stated in the Project Documentation. This compensation
shall be final and the judiciary shall not be entitled to mitigate it and it does not require
establishing the occurrence of any damage to the owner.
In addition, the Owner shall be entitled to clear the refuse himself and transport it to
the location designated by the concerned municipality. The Owner shall deduct the
cost of refuse clearance, transport and any other related costs including the office
QCS 2010
20.
QCS 2010
Section 1
Part 20
Page 3
expenses and overhead cost from the payment or the money due to the Contractor.
He may also stop the final payment due to the Contractor until such refuse has been
cleared and a certificate confirming this has been obtained from the concerned
Municipality.
20.2.4
Miscellaneous
The Contractor shall clean or replace all mechanical filters for equipment included in the
Works and for equipment directly affected by the construction of the Works.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
Part 21
Page 1
21.
21.1
21.1.1
21.1.2
21.1.3
21.1.4
Scope
Pre-requisite for Final Inspection
Approvals from Public Authorities
Hand Over
21.2
21.3
3
3
4
4
4
21.4
21.4.1
21.4.2
21.4.3
21.4.4
General
Record Drawings
Record Specifications
Maintenance Period Final Inspection
QCS 2010
4
5
5
5
2
2
3
3
Part 21
Page 2
21.
21.1
21.1.1
Scope
This Part specifies the requirements and procedures associated with the inspection and
handover of the Works.
Submittals
Quality Assurance
Materials
Clearance of Site
Section 9
21.1.2
The Contractor shall complete the following to the satisfaction of the Engineer before
requesting the pre-handover Inspection:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
When the Contractor has completed and cleaned the Works to the satisfaction of the
Engineer the Contractor shall request a final inspection. The request shall be forwarded to
the Owner by the Engineers Representative and a suitable date for the inspection shall be
arranged. The Contractor, Engineers Representative, maintenance department (if any) and
the supervising consultant (if any) shall be present. A list of outstanding items (if any) shall
be agreed and issued to the Contractor.
Upon completion of the listed outstanding items a further inspection shall be requested by
the Contractor, the request shall be forwarded to the Owner by the Engineers
Representative and a suitable date for the inspection shall be arranged. The Contractor,
Engineers Representative, maintenance department (if any) and the supervising consultant
(if any) shall be present.
A list of any items still outstanding shall be issued to the Contractor. If any of these are
deemed to be significant the Contractor shall complete these items and then request another
inspection as described in clause 21.1.2-2.
QCS 2010
This Section
Part 21
Page 3
For works that have no mechanical or electrical equipment if the outstanding items are
deemed not to be significant or if no outstanding items remain the Works inspected shall be
handed over.
21.1.3
The Contractor shall obtain all clearance certificates and approvals required as a
prerequisite to connecting the Works to the permanent water and/or power supply.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Engineer to obtain the necessary documents from
the Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation regarding connection to the permanent
water and/or power supply.
21.1.4
Hand Over
When the Contractor considers that the Works are complete he shall submit the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
A certificate stating that the Works are complete and that all the requirements of the
Project Documentation have been met.
A certificate stating that the Works have been inspected.
A certificate from the appropriate Municipality regarding cleanliness of the Site.
Approval from the PWA regarding satisfactory trench reinstatement in the Highway (if
applicable).
21.2
21.2.1
The Contractor shall provide all tools, spare parts and maintenance materials specified in the
Project Documentation.
The Contractor shall provide an itemised list of all the items to be furnished under this
Clause. Each item to be furnished shall be given a unique reference number. The list shall
include the reference number, a description of the item and the appropriate Specification
Section and Paragraph.
All the items furnished under this Clause shall be packaged for long term storage. Any items
requiring special storage conditions shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer.
All items furnished under this Clause shall be provided with a mark or tag for identification
purposes. The mark or tag shall include the reference number detailed in Clause 21.2.1-2.
Unless otherwise instructed, all items furnished under this Clause shall be delivered to the
Government Stores in accordance with the relevant provision of Part 9 of this Section,
Materials.
21.2.2
The Contractor shall provide notarised copies of all guarantees, warranties and bonds as
required by the Project Documentation. The guarantees, warranties and bonds should be
assembled in a binder with a durable plastic cover, complete with a table of contents.
QCS 2010
Part 21
Page 4
The date when any item is placed into full time operation for the Governments benefit
and with the Engineers approval.
The date of issue of the completion certificate.
21.3.1
Operation Data
The Contractor shall provide all operating data for all mechanical and electrical equipment
supplied under the Contract.
The operating data shall be presented on A4 size paper in ring binder with a durable plastic
cover.
21.3.2
The Contractor shall provide approved Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance
with the relevant provisions of Section 9, Mechanical and Electrical Equipment and Part 7 of
this Section, Submittals.
21.3.3
After all construction and starting is complete and before taking-over of any part of the
Works, the Contractor shall perform operational, field and performance tests as called for in
the Project Documentation.
The Contractor shall demonstrate operation of the facilities of the Engineer showing proper
sequence of operation as well as satisfactory performance of the system and individual
components. Any improper operation of the system or any improper, neglected or faulty
construction shall be repaired or corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall make such changes, adjustments or replacement of equipment as may be required to
make same comply with the Specifications, or replace any defective parts or material.
Failure of the system to perform at the specified level at the time of testing will be the
responsibility of the Contractor. In the event of failure of equipment to meet the specified
performance, the Owner reserves the right to reject such equipment or system, withhold
retention money or make claims on the Performance Bond.
The Contractor shall submit a consolidated schedule of operation, field and performance
tests no later than three (3) months before the schedule start of the first test and weekly a
schedule of tests to be carried out the following week. The Contractor shall inform the
Engineer not later than 24 hours in advance of changes in the scheduling of a test.
For all specified performance tests, the Contractor shall prepare and submit the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
A draft test procedure no later than two (2) months in advance of the schedule test
date.
A final test procedure no later two (2) weeks in advance of the scheduled test date.
A test report within two (2) weeks of the successful completion of the test.
21.4
21.4.1
General
Project Record Documents shall be stored in facilities that provide a suitable environment to
prevent damage or deterioration and to prevent loss.
QCS 2010
21.3
Part 21
Page 5
Project Record Documents shall include, but not be limited to the following:
(a)
(b)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
Drawings.
Specifications.
Addenda.
Variation orders.
Correspondence.
Transmittals
Inspection and Test Records
Record Drawings
Record drawings shall be clearly and correctly red-marked by the Contractor to show all
changes made during the construction process. The record drawings shall show the Works
as executed in accordance with the relevant provisions of Part 7 of this Section - Submittals.
21.4.3
Record Specifications
Record specifications shall be clearly and correctly annotated to show all changes made
during the construction process.
21.4.4
During the last month of the period of maintenance the Engineer will notify the maintenance
department that the maintenance period is about to expire. An inspection of the Works by
the Engineers Representative, maintenance department, and the Contractor shall be
undertaken to verify that all outstanding items have been completed.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
21.4.2
Part 22
Page 1
22.
22.1
22.1.1 Scope
22.1.2 Pre-requisite for Approval
2
2
22.2
22.3
DOCUMENTATION ....................................................................................... 2
22.4
QCS 2010
Part 22
Page 2
22.1
22.1.1
Scope
Qatar is committed to researching and using new technology and innovations within
construction industry. Because of this commitment it is open to proposals from outside
agencies in the use of new technologies and innovations.
This Part specifies the requirements associated with the proposal and approval of new
technologies and innovations for use in construction in Qatar.
22.1.2
New technologies / innovations are allowed for use in any project on experimental or
research basis after getting an approval from National Committee For Construction and
Building materials Specifications (NCCBS) of the Ministry of Environment and any other
concerned parties.
The period allowed for such an experiment or research shall be limited to a trial period of a
maximum of two years after which it will be evaluated prior to approval or otherwise by the
concerned parties.
The supplier will be required to submit a guarantee certificate for an agreed period of time.
The supplier shall submit a written warranty to bear all fiscal and legal responsibilities as a
result of using the experiment if not meeting the suppliers claims/specifications. He shall
remove any material or debris left from the experiment.
22.2
Notwithstanding the above Qatar wishes suppliers to propose technology and innovations
that it believes can benefit Qatar and the environment.
22.3
DOCUMENTATION
The technology provider shall be requested to submit with his proposals the following
documents:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Drawings
Specifications
Technology Reference and Manual
Specifications and Source
QCS 2010
22.
Part 22
Page 3
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Final approval of the technology will be dependant on NCCBS visits, inspection and tests.
Upon satisfaction of the committee, written approval shall be given and the specifications
incorporated into the QCS.
END OF PART
QCS 2010
22.4